Subject Pathways

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Accounting and Finance course.

Module 1: BMT214 Business Analytics

Module 2: ANF201 Financial Accounting

Module 3: ANF206 Introduction to Tax and Information Systems

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Accounting and Finance course.

Module 1: ANF304 Advanced Management Accounting

Module 2: ANF301 Corporate Finance

Module 3: BMT311 Business and Environmental Sustainability: Reaching net-Zero or BMT323 Employability Analysis & Professionalism

BMT214 Description

Business Analytics is generally thought to comprise three broad categories: descriptive analytics, predictive analytics, and prescriptive analytics. This module focuses on the first two and it has been designed for students that have taken an introductory statistics module as well as for students with no prior higher education experience in statistics.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with the theory and techniques to perform business analysis using descriptive and predictive analytics.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify data requirements and source required data;
2. Make sense of and analyse data using statistical methods and statistical software;
3. Interpret analysis results, gain insights into the interrelationships of different business aspects and their effect on organisational decision making, and use results/insights to inform decisions.

Indicative Content
1. Control and quality of decisions:
Are we in control of our decisions; is decision making rational or emotional; what makes for a good decision; is decision making an art or a science – data and information, characteristics of good information; applications of big data and analytics; use of data in the finance function and creating value for organisations
2. Overview of business decision-making methods
including multi-criteria decision analysis; conjoint analysis, pareto analysis, SWOT analysis, etc.
3. Decision tables and decision trees;
Demonstrate the relationship between data variables
4. Basic business data analysis using Excel.
The use of digital technologies in the finance function; demonstrate trends and patterns using an appropriate technique; prepare a trend equation using either graphical means or regression analysis; identify the limitations of forecasting models
5. Business decision-making in practice
using a Business Simulation

ANF206 Description

This module introduces students to Tax and forms the first of 2 modules covering this accredited subject.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student: with the ability to make the relevant calculations relating to income and national insurance.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of the structure and administration of the UK tax system as it affects individuals and incorporated businesses;
2. Calculate the Income Tax due on the income of an employed individual with other sources of income;
3. Demonstrate an understanding and calculate the basis periods for trading income of self-employed businesses and partnerships;
4. Compute an employer’s liability for National Insurance in respect of the employee and employer.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to taxation: General introduction to UK tax system; Administration of tax system; Tax evasion; Tax avoidance; HMRC Charter; Introduction to Income tax.
2. Taxation of the individual: Sources of income; Basis of assessment and allowable expenditure; Capital expenditure; Personal allowances and reliefs; Employee’s liability for National Insurance contributions.
3. Income from employment: Basis of assessment; Employment income; Non-taxable employment income; Deductible expenses;
4. Income from self-employment: The calculation of trading profits; Disallowed and allowable expenditure; Trading income allowance; Basis periods for trading income; Commencement of trade; Cessation of trade; Change of accounting date; Capital allowances; Trading losses and relief; partnerships.

ANF201 Description

This module seeks to expose students¿ to regulatory frameworks that underpin the preparation of financial statements for different forms of business organisations. It also seeks to develop students¿ ability to prepare partnership accounts and limited liability companies general-purpose financial statement based on relevant standards issued by the IASB.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the framework, both national and international, within which accounting statements are produced and the ability to prepare and present financial accounting statements for incorporated and unincorporated business entities.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. appraise the partnership as a form of business organisation and prepare accounts;
2. interpret the legislative and regulatory framework of limited company accounting, and prepare accounts (using relevant IASs/IFRSs issued by IASB).

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to Accounting and Reporting Frameworks: Accounting framework for a partnership and a limited liability company.
2. Partnerships: Legal background. appropriations, admissions/retirements, dissolutions and conversion to a partnership.
3. Financial Statements for Limited Liability Companies: Preparation and presentation of general purpose financial statements based on the provisions of relevant IASs/IFRSs issued by IASB.
4. Accounting treatments for current assets (inventories IAS2, trade receivables) and government grant IAS20
5. Accounting treatments for non-current assets (tangible IAS16, IFRS5/intangible IAS38/impairment IAS36)
6. Calculation and interpretation of accounting ratios and trends; Earnings per share IAS33 limitations of ratios
7. Prepare and report financial performance to address financial information users and stakeholder needs (IAS1)
8. Financial Reporting and basic group accounting including intra-group balances, unrealised profit on intra-group sales and acquisitions during the year (IFRS3, IFRS10)

ANF304 Description

The module is concerned with the use of management accounting for management control and advanced numerical techniques in decision-making.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to use the most suitable analytical tools to assist in various decision situations.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse and comment on the effect of the application of management accounting systems on business organisations;
2. Apply appropriate analytical methods to accounting problems to provide solutions for management;
3. Collaborate effectively within a group, to develop and present a response to a given problem.

Indicative Content
1. Control
Divisional performance appraisal. Transfer pricing. Aspects of modern management practice and accounting issues within different sectors (including social enterprise). Business Plans and management reports. Life-cycle costing.
2. Decision Analysis
An introduction to Activity Based Costing and Activity Based Management. Decisions under uncertainty, including decision trees and the value of information.
3. Strategic Management Accounting Techniques
Value Management: value chain analysis, economic value added. The use of strategic management accounting techniques within an organisation: target costing, linear programming, Learning Curve and Experience Curve and Regression analysis and cost estimation and other forecasting techniques.Performance analysis in NPF organisations and the public sector.
4. Economic goals and performance evaluation of profit, non-profit organisations and public sector organisations
Goals of different types of organisations and their effects on behaviour of organisations; shareholder wealth and its application in decision making.

ANF301 Description

An introductory module on corporate finance.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: knowledge of the main sources of corporate finance and the ability to apply key techniques for using and managing financing in large and small organisations. with: knowledge of the main sources of corporate finance and the ability to apply key techniques for using and managing financing in large and small organisations.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of some of the key theoretical concepts in corporate finance;
2. Analyse the impact of risk on various business and financial decisions. decisions.

Indicative Content
1. The role of the finance function
The role of finance function in organisations and finance professionals, and its evolution; the role of finance in cross-functional operations within an organisation
2. Time Value of Money
Future Value and Present Value; Annuities and Perpetuities; Quotes rates, Effective Annual Rate and Annual Percentage Rate.
3. Bond Valuation
Bond Pricing; Bond Ratings; Interest Rate Risk; Determination of Bond Yields.
4. Equity Valuation
Ordinary and Preference Shares; Cash Flow Valuation;
5. Capital Budgeting
Net Present Value, Payback Rule and Other Investment Criteria; Proforma Financial Statements; Special Cases of Discounted Cash Flow; Scenario Analysis; Sensitivity Analysis; Break-Even Analysis
6. Risk and Return
Expected Returns and Variances; Systemic and Unsystematic Risk; Diversification and Portfolio Risk; Systemic Risk and Beta; the Security Market Line and CAPM.
7. Cost of Capital
The Cost of Equity; the Cost of Debt and Preference Shares; the Weighted Average Cost of Capital.
8. Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy
The effect of Financial Leverage; Capital Structure and the Cost of Equity; Modigliani & Miller Propositions and the value of the firm; Optimal Capital Structure; the Pecking-Order Theory.
9. Dividends and Pay-out Policy
Cash Dividends and Dividend Payments; Does Dividend Policy Matter? Low vs. High-Dividend Payout; Shares Repurchases.
10. Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
Sources of short-term finance; Calculation of cash cycles; Reasons for holding Cash; Understanding Float; Investing Idle Cash; Determining the Target Cash Balance; Optimal Credit Policy; Inventory Management.

BMT311 Description

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with :

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand current societal and political factors driving organisations to reduce environmental impact;
2. Evaluate an organisations current environmental impact;
3. Create and implement a new strategy to reduce an organisations environmental impact

Indicative Content
1. Environmental stewardship
Examine why environmental stewardship is important for any business to pursue, and why that importance will likely grow stronger in the future
2. Evaluating impact
Methods for evaluating an organisations current environmental impact
3. Implementing your vision
Defining initiatives that fill gaps between the current state and the future vision and constructing a roadmap for achieving the vision
4. Managing change
To introduce and explain business process transformation methodologies, with supporting technology and tools, that focus on increasing operational efficiency and reducing waste. E.g. IBM’s Green Sigma methodology
5. Frameworks for going green
Frameworks for developing and implementing a green strategy, and illustrate the benefits many organisations have realised in each strategic area

BMT323 Description

The module affords students the opportunity to investigate how to make use of the established graduate employability frameworks and align their own skills, knowledge and experience with the requirements of prospective employers. They will then test out their professional skills on a live management project, set by a client.

Aims

The aim of this module is to help students prepare for graduate recruitment by investigating the modern graduate employability frameworks, assessing own skills, attributes and behaviours, and practicing these in a live management challenge.The aim of this module is to help students prepare for graduate recruitment by investigating the modern graduate employability frameworks, assessing own skills, attributes and behaviours, and practicing these in a live management challenge.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the current state of employment market in the field they wish to work, changing job requirements and identify the graduate employability elements required for the career in the chosen sector.
2. Assess personal employability, identify gaps and ways to address them.
3. Identify, investigate and make recommendations on a business or management problem demonstrating professional skills.
4. Reflect on project experience and develop learning points for the future.

Indicative Content
1. Understanding theoretical frameworks of graduate employability: Understanding the nature and purpose of modern concepts and frameworks of graduate employability.
2. Understanding employers’ needs: Understanding the trends in the chosen field of employment, employers’ requirements for staff, and how these requirements evolve.
3. Assessment of personal employability: Investigation of the range of employers’ requirements for workers in the student’s chosen field. Assessment of personal employability to determine areas for development.
4. Investigation: Creating a timeline for the project. Interacting with stakeholders in a professional manner. Research the negotiated business/management challenge, making effective use of current academic and professional literature. Consider data requirements to evidence your solution. Creating short to long term recommendations.
5. Professionalism in client management: Acting in a professional manner e.g. being diplomatic, utilising negotiation skills, understanding the needs of the company may be different from idealised situations described in literature.
6. Project debriefing: Present findings and solutions to your client.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Biomedical Science course.

Module 1: LSC202 Cell Biology & Immunology

Module 2: LSC203 Medical Microbiology

Module 3: LSC204 Medical Physiology

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Biomedical Science course.

Module 1: LSC301 Clinical Biochemistry and Cellular Pathology

Module 2: LSC302 Professional Studies 2

Module 3: LSC303 Clinical 2: Haematology & Transfusion Science

LSC202 Description

This module provides an integrative study of how cells in the body function to defend against injury and disease

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide a holistic view of defence against injury and disease including the mechanisms of cell proliferation and cell cycle control.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Discuss the roles of the main components of the immune system and explain how they provide a coordinated response to pathogens.
2. Evaluate the use of antibodies as molecular probes and detection systems.
3. Describe and explain the mechanism of hypersensitive reactions, autoimmune disorders and immunodeficiency diseases.
4. Recognise the mechanisms that regulate proliferation and differentiation in eukaryotic cells.

Indicative Content
1. Immune system
Innate & acquired immune systems. Specific & Non- specific defense mechanisms. The immune response. Molecular biology of T & B cell responses to antigens. Clonal selection and expansion. Role of lymphokines. Opsonisation, complement activation., Structure, function of antibody molecules. Classes of immunoglobulins. Pathologies of the immune system including hypersensitive reactions, autoimmune disorders and immunodeficiency diseases. Transplant immunology.
2. Antibodies as Molecular Probes
Diagnostic systems based on antibody-antigen interaction. Agglutination, Precipitation reactions. Antibody titres. Solid phase assays. RIA, ELISA, Immunofluorescence etc. Direct, Indirect and sandwich assays. Use of serological methods in diagnosis of diseases and antibodies for therapeutic applications.
3. Cell biology
Regulation of cell growth and proliferation; cell cycle checkpoints; growth factors, cell communication and signalling, principle of differentiation, tissue repair

LSC203 Description

This module is designed to give students a broad understanding of microbiological principles related to microbes associated with human disease, diagnosis and treatment.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of microbial growth and microbial diseases of humans. Students will gain knowledge of microbial characteristics, clinical diagnosis, epidemiology, pathogenesis and control of such infectious diseases.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand and explain contemporary theories of microbial growth, metabolism, differentiation and motility. 
2. Evaluate the factors that are involved with the epidemiology, pathogenesis, detection, diagnosis and control of infectious diseases (including antibiotics, vaccines and antibody therapies).
3. Analyse and discuss the results of practical experiments in an area related to disease epidemiology and/or control, or antibiotic sensitivity testing. 
4. Evaluate drug strategies for the control of infectious diseases and the current problems associated with the development of drug resistance. 

Indicative Content
1. Microbial Growth, Reproduction and Motility
The microbial (bacterial) growth curve and it's phases. Prokaryotic cell cycle. Phenomena associated with the growth curve (e.g. incorporation of peptidoglycan, overlapping chromosome replication etc.). Microbial metabolism. True turning point. Dormancy. Stringent response. Endosporulation. Chemotaxis, Individual motility. Community motility. Biofilm structure & function, bacterial conjugation, transformation & transduction
2. Bacterial diseases
Clinically important taxonomic groups of bacteria and viruses. Types of clinical specimens and processes for isolation and identification of organisms. Immunological and molecular systems for specific diagnosis. Clinical characteristics of diseases. Factors affecting clinical diagnosis including. Preventative strategies and therapies.  Microbial determinants of pathogenicity and virulence. Mechanisms of cell & tissue damage. Role of biochemical changes in diagnosis and monitoring of disease.
3. Antimicrobial chemotherapy and drug resistance
Modes of action of major synthetic and natural antibiotics. Antibiotic sensitivity testing in clinical laboratories. MIC values. Significance for therapeutic control in hospitals. Mechanisms of drug resistance in micro-organisms. Limitations of current drugs and novel development strategies. Qualitative and quantitative methods to identify antibiotic sensitivity of medically important organisms. 
4. Epidemiology and Public Health Measures
Transmission routes of disease agents - reservoirs, portals of entry, noscomial infections. Epidemiology - epidemics, pandemics, and endemic disease. Practical study of factors affecting epidemiology of diseases. Public health control methods - Vaccination, Sewage/Water treatment, legislation, public information etc. 

LSC204 Description

This module builds on the fundamental physiological processes studied in LSC102. A more in depth exploration of key systems will be used to investigate the pathophysiology of key diseases with a focus on deviation from healthy physiology; medical approaches to interventions and/or treatment will be discussed. There will be a strong focus on the genetic inheritability of these disorders as well as a key focus on the role of genetic mutations.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : a deeper understanding of key physiological systems and how genetics can play an important part in health and disease. Whilst studying the core material, the module also aims to focus on developing key scientific writing skills including, literature searches, paper reading and scientific writing.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Have an advanced understanding of the functioning of key physiological systems.
2. Relate knowledge of key physiological systems above to the underlying pathophysiology of key disorders.
3. Show an appreciation for the medical intervention and treatment of these key disorders.
4. Develop skills in scientific literature searches, scientific writing skills and independent learning.
5. Explain the mechanisms by which cells obtain energy from substrates.

Indicative Content
1. Advanced Neurophysiology
a focus on synaptic physiology, plasticity and the role of these processes in learning, memory and addiction. Dysfunction of important physiological processes in key neurological disorders.
2. Advanced reproductive physiology
a focus on infertility, the underlying pathophysiology and treatments.
3. Advanced musculoskeletal physiology
a focus on skeletal muscle and associated structures, tendons, ligaments bones etc. Pathophysiology of skeletal muscle e.g. muscular dystrophy.
4. An introduction to scientific writing
will focus on literature searches, paper reading and scientific writing skills.

LSC301 Description

This module is formulated to enhance knowledge and understanding of the cellular, tissue and molecular bases of disease and dysfunction in humans. It considers general processes and approaches available for diagnosis and monitoring, and then focuses on selected pathologies in an integrative (ie. pathogenesis, diagnosis/monitoring, clinical consequences, etc)context. It is primarily designed for students on biomedical sciences or similar degrees. 

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of (i) cellular, molecular and systemic processes in human disease; (ii) techniques available for diagnosis and clinical management; and (iii) the conceptual framework for understanding human dysfunctions. 

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Differentiate between the core techniques of histo-/cytopathology, and evaluate their theoretical basis, applications, and strengths and weaknesses. 
2. Relate the fundamental principles of pathology eg. Central dogma, nomenclature, disease types, core characteristics to the categorisation and evaluation of disease states. 
3. Critically appraise the major mechanisms and clinical sequelae of: cell injury; inflammations/repair; growth disorders, ischaemia/infarction; adaptive changes; neoplasia; immunopathology.
4. By reference to examples taken from the GIT, hepatobiliary and female reproductive systems critically analyse relationships between cell/molecular changes and the main associated diseases.
5. Relate the pathogenesis and clinical profiles of major biochemical dyfunctions/diseases to their diagnostic tests and clinical management (Ex. Diabetes, liver/kidney, electrolyte imbalances) 
6. Distinguish between techniques and technologies clinical biochemistry and pathology including emergent technologies and applications, and evaluate their strengths, weaknesses and challenges. 

Indicative Content
1. Basic Principles of Pathology
Structural-functional correlations, signs, symptoms and syndromes; pathological terms and terminology; organisation of pathology services. The role and future of molecular pathology. The vital role of imaging in pathology. 
2. Core Techniques in Clinical Biochemistry
Introduction: Range of diagnostic, monitoring and screening tests; basics of test design, sample handling and test interpretation. Evaluation of analytes in selected specific conditions (diseases and dysfunctions) eg. carbohydrate and lipid disorders, and for specific organ/system functions eg. liver, kidney, heart. Water, electrolytes and acid-base balance. Tumour markers. 
3. Core Techniques in Cytopathology and Histopathology
Histotechnique: Types of microscopy and applications in cyto-/histopathology; preparation of cells and tissues; microtomy, cryomicrotomy and ultramicrotomy; range of routine and special stains; practical challenges of staining; reporting procedures. Structure/ultrastructure of normal cells and tissues; structural/ultrastructural correlates of disease. Immunocytochemical approaches eg probe range, FISH. Role of imaging in pathological screening, diagnosis and monitoring. 
4. Understanding Neoplasia
Distinctive characteristics of neoplasms; Benign- malignant spectrum; cancer classification systems; terminology; characteristics of cancer cells (and their use in diagnosis). Molecular pathogenesis/multi- step nature of neoplasia.Metastasis. Clinical consequences of established malignancies eg.paraneoplastic syndromes 
5. Cellular Pathology: Cell Injury, Adaptation and Death
Cellular homeostasis. Dysregulation of the cell cycle, DNA damage and repair and associated diseases. Responses to injury. Necrosis and apoptosis. Patterns and types of of necrosis. Adaptive responses to injury eg. hyperplasia, atrophy,metaplasia, dysplasia (Neoplasia considered under separate heading). Abnormal deposition; calcification. 
6. General Pathology: Inflammation and Repair
Acute inflammation - Sequence, vascular dimensions, mediators. Chronic inflammations. Tissue repair processes (At tissue, cellular and molecular levels). Repair of selected tissues eg. skin, bone. New developments in tissue repair. Effects of aging on repair. Immunopatholgical dimensions. 
7. Systemic Pathology: Selected Dysfunctions
Selected systems - In-depth illustrations of the integration of (1) Cellular, molecular and systemic approaches;(2)Investigative techniques; and (3) Management of clinical consequences. Examples will be taken from: (1) Colorectal carcinomas, IBDs, stomach cancers; (2) Female reproductive cancers; (3) Hepatocellular failures and other hepatobiliary dysfunctions; and (4) Renal pathologies. 

LSC302 Description

This module is designed to provide all BMS students, on both Applied and Standard programme routes, with [a] an understanding of information relevant to professional work in the clinical environment, and [b] an understanding of bioethics (medical ethics). The module covers essential aspects of the profession that are mandatory for all students on both programme routes, in order to meet IBMS accreditation requirements. the module is an essential pre-requisite for students undertaking subsequent hospital placements on the Applied route, in order to meet HCPC approval requirements.

Aims
The aim of this module is to: [a] provide the student with an understanding of [a] career structure, professional codes and good laboratory management in Health Service Biomedical Science and other bioscience industries; and [b] provide reflective education in bioethics.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically evaluate the functional role of Biomedical Scientists 
2. Discuss and explain the professional scope of practice and conduct in Biomedical Science and other Bioscience Industries and outline the functional roles of the IBMS and HCPC. 
3. Evaluate relevant Health & Safety legislation and its appropriate implementation for Bioscience employees. 
4. Discuss and explain the importance of specimen integrity on receipt into the laboratory. 
5. Discuss and explain clinical governance and accreditation in laboratories.
6. Evaluate the ethical issues arising from developments in medicine and biology.

Indicative Content
1. Management and Professional Issues in the NHS context
Professional regulation and conduct, role of the Biomedical Scientist, user demand and management of staff and workload, training and CPD, effective team working. 
2. Health and Safety
Legislation governing laboratory Health and Safety, hazard identification and risk assessment, COSHH, biological safety. 
3. Bioscience industry
The role of the ICH Guidelines (Quality, Safety, Efficacy), FDA Regulations and their role in Biotech/Biological Product Development and Manufacture.
4. Bioethics
Ethical approaches: deontological and teleological. Ethical systems: intuitive responses, religous laws, rights, utilitarianism. Application of ethical approaches and principles to contemporary bioscience and biomedical issues.

LSC303 Description

This module deals with the clinical detection, diagnosis and therapeutic treatment of a variety of human diseases. The module will be delivered by practicing clinical biomedical scientists and will examine blood and its constituents in both the normal and diseased states and appraise the use of a range of diagnostic investigations. 

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with a knowledge of the normal state of blood and the changes typical in a range of clinical conditions; a knowledge of blood groups and matching techniques for the use of therapeutic blood components in treatment. 

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Compare and contrast the haematology blood parameters in normal and diseased states
2. Appreciate the applications of a range of investigative techniques and their expected results related to common conditions. 
3. Discuss blood group systems and evaluate techniques relevant to serology and transfusion. 
4. Appreciate the essential requirements for the preparation, storage and use of blood products. 
5. Critically analyse and discuss the results of practical experiments in areas related to Haematology & Transfusion Science. 

Indicative Content
1. Haematology
Red cell, white cell and platelet disorders and their causes. Inherited and acquired anaemias, malignant and other blood disorders. Blood coagulation and its defects.
2. Serology and transfusion science
Blood group systems. Donor blood collection. Compatibility testing and transfusion hazards. Blood product and reagent preparation, testing, storage and use.
3. Haematology and serology practicals
Morphological features of blood cells, and their classification. Blood processing and testing.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Business Management course.

Module 1: BMT214 Business Analytics

Module 2: BMT213 Theory and Practice in HRM

Module 3: BMT216 People, Planet, Profit

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Business Management/Business & Human Resource Management courses.

Module 1: BMT302 Digital Business Strategy

Module 2: BMT311 Business and Environmental Sustainability: Reaching net-zero

Module 3: BMT323 Employability Analysis & Professionalism

Option 3 

This pathway is from the 4th year of the BA Business Management course and should only be selected by final year or Masters students.

Module 1: BMT403 Managing Change

Module 2: BMT409 Strategic Management

Module 3: BMT422 Operations Management and Business Redesign

BMT214 Description

Business Analytics is generally thought to comprise three broad categories: descriptive analytics, predictive analytics, and prescriptive analytics. This module focuses on the first two and it has been designed for students that have taken an introductory statistics module as well as for students with no prior higher education experience in statistics.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with the theory and techniques to perform business analysis using descriptive and predictive analytics.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify data requirements and source required data;
2. Make sense of and analyse data using statistical methods and statistical software;
3. Interpret analysis results, gain insights into the interrelationships of different business aspects and their effect on organisational decision making, and use results/insights to inform decisions.

Indicative Content
1. Control and quality of decisions:
Are we in control of our decisions; is decision making rational or emotional; what makes for a good decision; is decision making an art or a science – data and information, characteristics of good information; applications of big data and analytics; use of data in the finance function and creating value for organisations
2. Overview of business decision-making methods
including multi-criteria decision analysis; conjoint analysis, pareto analysis, SWOT analysis, etc.
3. Decision tables and decision trees;
Demonstrate the relationship between data variables
4. Basic business data analysis using Excel.
The use of digital technologies in the finance function; demonstrate trends and patterns using an appropriate technique; prepare a trend equation using either graphical means or regression analysis; identify the limitations of forecasting models
5. Business decision-making in practice using a Business Simulation.

BMT213 Description

This module builds on students’ existing knowledge of human resource management and develops their understanding of HRM theory and practice.

Aims
The aim of this module is to develop students’ critical appraisal of the role of human resource management within contemporary organisations.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of key HRM concepts and practices;
2. Explain and evaluate the purpose and operation of HRM in contemporary organisations;
3. Demonstrate awareness of HRM-related social, cultural and environmental responsibilities in a global context.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to HRM
Theoretical perspectives to HRM; practical approaches to HRM
2. Context and HRM
National, international, occupational, organisational and individual contexts of HRM in theory and in practice
3. Strategic HRM
Introduction to strategic human resource management; ‘best fit’ and ‘best practice’ approaches
4. HRM, work and wellbeing
Fair work; dignity at work; mental health and stress at work; the benefits and challenges of flexibility
5. HRM, equality and diversity
Inequalities in the labour market and in the workplace; managing diverse workforce
6. Managing conflict in the workplace
Conflict in the employment relationship; misbehaviour, discipline and grievance procedures; bullying and harassment; disputes
7. Contemporary HRM trends and future challenges
Continuity and change in work and employment; gig economy; (ir)responsible HRM

BMT216 Description

This module develops an awareness in students in the critical success factors of sustainable business.

Aims
The module aims to develop student awareness of the business challenges associated with sustainable business creation and development and to provide students with the knowledge and skills required to make a convincing case for investment in a sustainable business idea.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify the key business challenges associated with the creation of sustainable business.
2. Prepare and produce a sustainable business investment pitch
3. Understand the issues involved in ethical practices in emergent business
4. Identify and promote new sustainable business opportunities

Indicative Content
1. People: Beautifying Business − Opportunity or gimmick.
Managing the triple bottom line; Business boundaries, doing more with less; strategies for sustainable business development; Business and the planet; Sustainable entrepreneurship and new business models, Corporate social responsibility
2. Profit: Ethical investing and responsible investment
Responsible investment and the cost to society and the individual.
3. Planet: Environment, enterprise and innovation
Wealth from Waste… Students will be encouraged to consider opportunities for innovation which identify revenue streams arising from re−use of waste materials
4. Energy Enterprise
Ideas and innovation which maximise current energy sources or innovate in the realm of renewable energy production/storage/delivery; Planet Premium and Ecosystem Services… acknowledging and valuing benefits and services delivered by the natural environment. Payment for ecosystem services, willingness to pay.

BMT302 Description

Exploiting technology to transform service delivery through Internet portals, intra-corporate connected environments, social networks etc. and transforming internal processes and ways of working with partners are strategic issues considered by most organisations, both large and small. This module is about how companies can improve their competitiveness by using digital solutions.

Aims
The aim of this module is to build student capacity in understanding the role of digital solutions in creating effective business practice that enhances a company’s competitive advantage.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Assess the impact of digital technology on business competitiveness;
2. Critically evaluate a range of issues relating to customers and companies engaging in digital processes;
3. Assess the options associated with development of a digital solution for improving business competitiveness, formulate own proposals for digital strategy and create implementation framework.

Indicative Content
1. Meaning and scope of e-business and e-commerce
Introduction and overview: current trends and issues. The evolution of e-business.
2. Analysis of firm's external environment
The macro-environment and implications for e-business ventures. Defining industry, segments and target markets for e-business.
3. Analysis of firm's internal environment
The meaning of core competence in e-business; the four virtual spaces of the ICDT framework for interaction with customers; the meaning of the company¿s value chain and value network.
4. Digital business strategy: Approaches
The elements of strategy design for digital business; application of generic strategies to e-business.
5. e-Business and the supply chain
The elements of supply chain management and their relationship to the value chain and value networks; strategic partnering.
6. Foundations of value creation in e-business
Understanding of what the value is and elements that contribute to value creation; the value grid and levers of e-value creation.
7. Dealing with disruptive innovations in e-business
Successful imitation and the barriers to imitation; how companies can assess the threat of a disruptive innovation; the ways to deal with a disruptive innovation in e- business.
8. Strategy for the internal organisation of e-business
Reasons that determine `make-or-buy’ decisions in e- business; the organisational structures for e-business activities; the concept of value chain deconstruction and the role of the Internet for unbundling the corporation.
9. Choosing an e-business strategy for interacting with user
The trade-off between richness and reach in e-business; customer relationship management in the digital context; the concept of mass-customisation.

BMT311 Description

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand current societal and political factors driving organisations to reduce environmental impact;
2. Evaluate an organisations current environmental impact;
3. Create and implement a new strategy to reduce an organisations environmental impact

Indicative Content
1. Environmental stewardship
Examine why environmental stewardship is important for any business to pursue, and why that importance will likely grow stronger in the future
2. Evaluating impact
Methods for evaluating an organisations current environmental impact
3. Implementing your vision
Defining initiatives that fill gaps between the current state and the future vision and constructing a roadmap for achieving the vision
4. Managing change
To introduce and explain business process transformation methodologies, with supporting technology and tools, that focus on increasing operational efficiency and reducing waste. E.g. IBM’s Green Sigma methodology
5. Frameworks for going green
Frameworks for developing and implementing a green strategy, and illustrate the benefits many organisations have realised in each strategic area

BMT323 Description

The module affords students the opportunity to investigate how to make use of the established graduate employability frameworks and align their own skills, knowledge and experience with the requirements of prospective employers. They will then test out their professional skills on a live management project, set by a client.

Aims

The aim of this module is to help students prepare for graduate recruitment by investigating the modern graduate employability frameworks, assessing own skills, attributes and behaviours, and practicing these in a live management challenge.The aim of this module is to help students prepare for graduate recruitment by investigating the modern graduate employability frameworks, assessing own skills, attributes and behaviours, and practicing these in a live management challenge.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the current state of employment market in the field they wish to work, changing job requirements and identify the graduate employability elements required for the career in the chosen sector.
2. Assess personal employability, identify gaps and ways to address them.
3. Identify, investigate and make recommendations on a business or management problem demonstrating professional skills.
4. Reflect on project experience and develop learning points for the future.

Indicative Content
1. Understanding theoretical frameworks of graduate employability: Understanding the nature and purpose of modern concepts and frameworks of graduate employability.
2. Understanding employers’ needs: Understanding the trends in the chosen field of employment, employers’ requirements for staff, and how these requirements evolve.
3. Assessment of personal employabilityInvestigation of the range of employers’ requirements for workers in the student’s chosen field. Assessment of personal employability to determine areas for development.
4. Investigation: Creating a timeline for the project. Interacting with stakeholders in a professional manner. Research the negotiated business/management challenge, making effective use of current academic and professional literature. Consider data requirements to evidence your solution. Creating short to long term recommendations.
5. Professionalism in client management: Acting in a professional manner e.g. being diplomatic, utilising negotiation skills, understanding the needs of the company may be different from idealised situations described in literature.
6. Project debriefing: Present findings and solutions to your client.

BMT403 Description

This module combines theory and practice to examine organisational change and transformation in times of uncertainty.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with: a conceptual framework for understanding how change can be delivered for the purposes of long-term organisational improvements in complex operating contexts.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the contexts, drivers and challenges of change, particularly in relation to the fourth industrial revolution;
2. Examine a range of theoretical perspectives on change;
3. Evaluate the change strategies deployed by organisations for both sustained and revolutionary organisational change;
4. Critically analyse the nature of leadership in the change process

Indicative Content
1. Analysing change contexts and drivers
The change context: globalisation, technology, and changing market dynamics; change management and sustainability
2. Theories of change and approaches to change management
Models of change and change management; trans-formational change and organisations; Critical discourse in change management.
3. Human resources issues in change management
Participative change; managing psychological contracts, social identity, stakeholder positioning and dynamics in times of radical change; voice, dialogue and rethinking resistances in radical change; Culture, habits and unlearning.
4. Change in context
(this will change each year and will form the basis of the guest lectures)
5. Leading and managing change
Transactional and transformational leadership; a competency framework for transformational leadership; values and value-based systems in transformational change;

BMT409 Description

To succeed in the future, managers must develop the resources and capabilities needed to gain and sustain advantage in competitive markets. The way in which organisations attempt to develop such competitive advantage constitutes the essence of their strategy. The module examines the main concepts, approaches and tools of strategic management in the contemporary business environment. The module identifies tools of strategic analysis, discusses strategic choice available to a firm, examines elements and complexities involved in strategy formulation and implementation. The module also introduces the principal concepts of strategy in the public sector.

Aims

The aims of this module are to provide the student with: the fundamentals of how a business firm can create and sustain a competitive advantage; and what strategic options are available in the public sector.

Learning OutcomesBy the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Assess strategic choices and formulate a strategy of a firm;
2. Critically identify and apply tools of strategic analysis of a firm that seeks growth and sustainable competitive advantage;
3. Evaluate concepts and theories of business strategy and competitive advantage and their implications for contemporary business practice;
4. Assess strategic choices facing the public sector organisations, investigate options for strategy formulation and implementation;
5. Critically assess the concept of public-private partnerships by evaluating their advantages and shortcomings.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to strategic management: What is strategy; strategic analysis; classical and emergent schools; strategic thinking; levels of strategy.
2. Strategy context. Competitive advantage of a firm: Defining the business environment. Industry analysis: turbulences and dynamics. Porter¿s five forces; new dynamics in the 21st century.
3. Business level strategy: Sources of competitive advantage: Competitive stance, business level strategy, corporate level strategy; generic strategies; hybrid strategy; value chains.
4. Beyond competition: The nature of competition; co-operation; co-opetition; strategic alliances and joint ventures; mergers and acquisitions.
5. Strategy in the public sector: Public-private partnership as strategic tool of public sector management.

BMT422 Description

Operations management deals with efficiencies in planning, organizing, and supervising in production and manufacturing. It is delivery-focused, ensuring that an organization successfully turns inputs to outputs in an effective manner. Operations management has also firm foundations in supply chain management and logistics. The module allows students to gain an understanding of key areas of the subject from theory and practice with emphasis on pragmatic techniques to evaluate and improve operations in different settings and markets. Students will also examine the Business Process Redesign and Re-engineering which is a powerful approach to bring in significant and sustained improvements in the effectiveness, efficiency, and responsiveness of an organization.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the opportunity to apply their analysis skills to a variety of operations challenges in both the product and service industries.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate and select appropriate approaches to designing, planning, monitoring and controlling operations and supply chains in a range of organisational and inter-organisational contexts.
2. Apply a range of contemporary supply chain and operational techniques to deal with the operational requirements and challenges.
3. Use the ADDIE model to redesign a process.

Indicative Content
1. Operations Management in its Organisational Context: The operations function within the organisation and its relationship with other functional areas; The role of the operations manager.
2. Introduction to Supply Chain Management: The supply network; designing the supply chain (make or buy); supply chain stages; uncertainly and risk factors, value chain.
3. Designing the process: Analysing, Designing, Developing, Implementing and Evaluating in business process redesign (The ADDIE Model).
4. Capacity Management: Demand v. production, models of capacity planning, measuring capacity (utilisation and efficiency calculations)
5. Inventory ManagementWhy hold stock? Costs of inventory, ABC analysis, economic order quantity, inventory management strategies
6. Digitalisation in Operations Management, supply chain and logistics: Operations 4.0, Supply chain and logistics 4.0, E-supply chain, IT application in supply chain system, enterprise resource planning, technology strategies
7. The end-to-end supply chain: Purchasing and supply, materials and distribution management, logistics, balancing flow within a supply chain, managing bottlenecks and restrictions.
8. Outsourcing: Make or buy decisions in sourcing strategy; supplier selection; outsourcing supply chain management; co- ordinating supply and managing supplier relationships & partnerships, supply chain risks management
9. The customer interface: Meeting customer requirements, forecasting demand, lean operations and JIT, lean principles, reducing waste
10. Contemporary supply chain dynamics: Supply chain measures, six sigma, strategic alliances and collaborative partnerships, characteristics of supply chains in the contemporary global economy

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BEng Civil and Environmental Engineering course.

Module 1: EEM208 Environmental Engineering

Module 2: EEM203 Water Resources and Fluid Mechanics

Module 3: EEM201 Surveying and Construction

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BEng Civil and Environmental Engineering course.

Module 1: EEM302 Civil and Environmental Engineering Practice

Module 2: EEM304 Geotechnical Engineering

Module 3: EEM305 Structural Engineering 2

EEM208 Description

This module applies the principle of environmental engineering in the analysis and management of environmental pollution

Aims
The aim of this Module is to enable students analyse the distribution and movement of water and contaminants of the physical environment; between air, surface water, groundwater, and to apply engineering principles involved in managing our environmental systems.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Model the dispersion of air pollutants in the atmosphere and predict air quality.
2. Demonstrate an understanding of unit processes for the abatement and control of drinking water pollutants.
3. Carry out an environmental impact assessment.
4. Evaluate design and policy options for the abatement and control of water pollution.

Indicative Content
1. Water Quality
Overview of the principles of air, water and land interaction and surface water quality management: Introduction of water quality and management; Fate of water pollutants in rivers and lakes; Drinking Water Quality standards, UK and EU Directives; Fundamentals of self-purification; Models used as quality predictive tools: Streeter Phelps equation.
2. Water Treatment
Coagulation, flocculation, sedimentation, filtration and disinfection process.
3. Groundwater quality and management
Surface Water and Groundwater Interaction, Stream- Aquifer Interaction. Aquifer management.
4. Air quality and pollution management
Overview on sources of air pollution and monitoring and control of emissions of air pollutants; Dispersion of air pollutants in atmosphere; Air pollution modelling approaches and Indoor air pollution.
5. Environmental impact Assessment (EIA)
EIA procedure. Preparation of Environmental Impact Statement (EIS). Case studies and EIA of developments.

EEM203 Description

This module introduces students to the fundamental principles of hydrology and hydrostatics and enables them to apply these principles to model problems relevant to water resources and civil engineering.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide a basic understanding of hydrostatics, and a knowledge of the various types of water resources and factors affecting their availability and quality.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of properties of fluids and describe and apply concepts of liquid flow behaviour.
2. Understand, describe and apply principles of flow measurement techniques.
3. Describe hydrologic principles and the sources and types of water and the factors affecting the quantity and quality of surface waters.
4. Understand and apply concepts of hydrostatic pressure to problems on surfaces submerged in fluids.

Indicative Content
1. Hydrology
Review of the hydrological cycle. Fundamental principles of hydrology. Precipitation, occurrence and forms, estimation and measurements, rain gauges and methods of data handling. Evaporational influences and estimation methods.
2. Water Use and Quality
Demand, use and re-use of water. Sustainable water use. Human and environmental needs for water and water conservation. Introduction to water quality parameters; quality of various types and sources of water; factors affecting quality.
3. Water related disasters, and Sustainable Water Management
Floods and droughts - nature and causes. Sustainable water management, sustainable catchment management and sustainable drainage systems (SUDS).
4. Fluid Properties
Review of the properties of liquid fluids. Reynolds experiment; Reynolds number, mean velocity, discharge; description of types and patterns of flow; velocity gradients, laminar and turbulent motion, streamlines and flow nets.
5. Fluid Statics
Variation of pressure in a fluid; pressure measurements; pressure forces on surfaces; hydrostatic forces on plane and curved surfaces submerged in fluids; buoyancy forces; stability and metacentric height.
6. Fluid Dynamics
Continuity equations, conservation of mass, steady flow; Bernoulli equations: application to devices; the momentum equation.

EEM201 Description

Practical application of civil and environmental engineering skills, techniques and knowledge. Information Modelling: Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, and Digital Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Be a problem-solver, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with a deep understanding of surveying and construction activities; practical application of topographic surveying skills, an awareness of the preliminary considerations involved in construction developments and a knowledge of the materials and procedures employed in construction of small commercial/industrial building works.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Apply surveying and data handling techniques and use surveying equipment and software for the completion of a large practical land survey, setting out of construction works, and report preparation.
2. Apply prior understanding of materials, sustainability, safety practice and construction techniques to a example of civil engineering construction.

Indicative Content
1. Land Surveying: Understand various land surveying techniques such as detailed topographical survey using total stations / electronic data capture; computer processing and plot production; calculations for setting out (plan position and vertical control); setting out for small projects.
2. Preparation of professional report and plan diagrams based on field application of surveying techniques and practice: Preparation of professional report and plan diagrams based on field application of surveying techniques and practice
3. Construction Practice: Planning, execution and appraisal for the construction of a civil engineering activity; temporary works; materials and equipment requirements, method statements, resource management, health and safety assessment, sustainability assessment.
4. Professional reporting: Preparation and professional reporting of engineering practice and outcomes
5. Risk assessment: Awareness and application of risk assessment and health and safety requirements for all aspects of engineering practice
6. Sustainability considerations: Awareness and application of sustainability considerations for all aspects of engineering practice
7. Conceptual design: Client requirements; scheme design and evaluation

EEM302 Description

This module is intended to prepare students for work within the diverse opportunities provided within the engineering profession and to develop essential knowledge and skills in order to contribute to the organisation and management of engineering projects. 

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : The aim of this Module is to provide the student with knowledge and understanding of the practical application of management and health and safety to work within engineering to appreciate the diverse interrelationships between the professional and the organisation. 

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Evaluate the procurement process including roles of professionals in complying with health and safety requirements in engineering work. 
2. Plan and manage the project process by solving project problems through application of appropriate project management techniques. 
3. Appraise the cost effectiveness and sustainability of construction projects and construction operations. 
4. Develop professional employability skills, apply principles of professional code of conduct, identify attributes for personal development and actively engage with CPD.

Indicative Content
1. Health and Safety:
CDM and other current health and safety regulations, roles obligations and responsibilities under legislation for health and safety.
2. Procurement strategies, tendering and construction contracts:
Management of the design process, estimating and tendering, pre-tender planning, construction contracts; contract formation, contractual problems. Topical procurement issues.
3. Project control tools:
Planning and programming tools and techniques, strategies for managing uncertainty, PERT and related techniques. Cost control systems, quality management.
4. Economic and sustainability assessment:
Economic evaluation: life Cycle costing, CEEQUAL and BREEAM. Cost benefit analysis Sustainability assessment approaches. Sustainability indicators, Multi-criteria analysis.
5. Professional employability skills:
Employer/employee relationship. Interview skills and techniques. Presenting a professional CV. Equality and diversity. Professional codes of conduct (such as ICE) and specific issues including resolving ethical dilemmas through case studies.

EEM304 Description

Initial development of geotechnical analysis and design and their application in civil engineering.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the students with : An understanding of soils physical and mechanical properties in theory and practice and an introduction into geotechnical engineering problems.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Comprehend the origin, physical and mechanical properties of cohesive and granular soils.
2. Understand the basic rock mechanics and laboratory tests to determine the mechanical properties.
3. Analyse geotechnical shear strength and compressibility data to obtain the relevant design parameters.
4. Evaluate and classify soils based on their physical and mechanical properties derived from visual examination and data from laboratory tests.

Indicative Content
1. Physical properties of soil
Factors controlling the weathering of rock and the formation of soils. Moisture content, density, void ratio, porosity, air content and saturation.
2. Soil Compaction and re-use
The compaction of soils − theory and practise. Suitability criteria and the re−use of fill for engineering purposes.
3. Effective stress
The concept of total and effective stress and pore water pressure.
4. Soil Shear Strength
The theory of soil shear strength, Mohr Coulomb failure criterion. Determine shear strength parameters for design purposes from shear box, undrained triaxial.
5. Consolidation of soils
Measurement of the consolidation of cohesive soils in the laboratory, theoretical consideration of amount and rate of settlement, over-consolidation ratio and the application of the e/log p' graph.
6. Seepage
Flow net construction, seepage into excavations, seepage forces and piping.
7. Laboratory Work
Determine moisture content, Atterberg Limit and shear strength of sand and saturated clay. Safe working practices in a laboratory situation.

EEM305 Description

Structural design in reinforced concrete and in steel.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to investigate and solve geotechnical and structural problems related to the built environment.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. To fully understand and evaluate the requirements, principles and procedures for the design of structural elements and systems.
2. To understand and apply the appropriate codes of practice and industry standards/published technical literature for designing structural elements and systems.
3. To investigate and analyse the behaviour of structural elements at ultimate collapse.

Indicative Content
1. Design Loads
Wind loading and snow loading.
2. Reinforced Concrete
Material properties, limit state design requirements, loads and partial safety factors, failure mechanism and criteria Design of structural elements including singly and doubly reinforced beams, one-way and two-way slabs, axially loaded columns, foundations and cantilever retaining walls
3. Design of Steel Structures
Material properties and grading, partial safety factors, section properties and classification, Design of beams subject to uniaxial bending, Design of columns and base plates, Design of steel connections.
4. Plastic collapse of steel structures
Plastic hinge formation, plastic moment capacity, plastic section modulus, shape factor, failure criterion, upper and lower bound theorems, plastic analysis of statically indeterminate beams and single storey, single bay portal frames.
5. Use of computer packages and design
6. Laboratory Work
Concrete lab. Safe working practices in a laboratory situation.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Computer Arts course.

Please choose three of the below modules:

Module 1: ART204 Concept Design and Development 

Module 2: ART206 Character Animation 

Module 3: ART208 Technical Art Applications

Module 4: ART207 3D Asset Creation 

Module 5: DES206 User Interfaces and User Experience 

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Computer Arts course.

Module 1: ART308 Critical Studies

For Module 2, choose one of the following 40 credit modules:

ART310 Advanced 3D Practice (40 Credits)

ART311 Animation Production (40 Credits)

ART312 Visual Development (40 Credits)

ART204 Description

The focus of this module is to develop in each student a practical understanding of the artistic and technical processes deployed in the field of concept art and production design for entertainment (computer games, film, comics or animation, etc.). Students will explore this field by implementing into their own practice common industrial procedures such as visual research, design workflows, and digital visualisation skills, employing industry standard applications to aid their creative process. Students will produce a portfolio of evidence that will exhibit a firm grasp of digital concept design, development and production methods, by showcasing personal growth through applied practical concept design skills.

Aims

Equip the student with practical skills and knowledge necessary for developing visual concepts relevant to entertainment production.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Employ visual research skills in the deliberation and formation of novel visual concept designs.
2. Emply digital drawing and painting skills necessary for the successful development of concept designs in conjunction with considered implementation of fundamental art theories and principles.
3. Exhibit a knowledge of relevant topics to this domain such as art history, media design and contemporary industrial contexts; Students should be able to demonstrate an ability to contextualise how this knowledge relates to their personal conceptual and technical skills development.
4. Utilise techniques and software packages common to concept design practice and an ability to adhere to relevant concept design workflows, from generating initial ideas through to completed well-presented visual concept works.

ART206 Description

This module aims to develop students understanding of the relationship between written story, performance and visual storytelling in animated sequences. Students will explore narrative and acting theory in relation to the creation of an animated performance, and will test these ideas through the creation of and iteration upon animated sequence(s). The module is primarily aimed at animation practitioners wishing to develop expressive animated character performances.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to develop students understanding and practical execution of animated character performance as an expressive contextualised form of communication.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate critical understanding of relationships between narrative context, character and performance for animation purposes
2. Examine, evaluate and synthesise animation and acting techniques which imbue personality upon a digital character through visual enquiry and iterative practice
3. Generate a portfolio that demonstrates development of complex personalities within an animated context

ART208 Description

This module is designed to introduce students to a range of technical art practices in media production. Within the module students will study technical art pipelines, rigging, scripting and working in real-time media production software. Students will compile a portfolio of work which demonstrates their engagement with technical art practices.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of technical art practice and the ability to artistically and technically solve issues relating to the production of computer-generated media.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Develop technical knowledge appropriate to the production of technical art outcomes
2. Demonstrate understanding of the requirements of the technical artist in production pipelines
3. Utilise iterative practice and critical thinking in the creation of technical art outcomes that are fit for purpose

ART207 Description

This module will introduce students to 3D asset creation, providing them with the knowledge and skills required to design and build their own 3D assets for games in a production setting. By developing abilities and awareness within the field of 3D art asset creation, students will create their own strategies for independent learning within this broad subject area. Abertay Attributes: Intellectual - Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied. Professional - Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers. Personal - Be determined, ambitious, articulate, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising. Digital - Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. - Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the ability to identify and utilise appropriate industrial production techniques and processes in the creation of 3D artefacts for Games, providing them with the technical and conceptual skills required to competently execute 3D workflows.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Create 3D digital assets for specific underlying developmental and artistic goals.
2. Demonstrate the ability to create and present 3D game assets for application in a game engine.
3. Dissect visual reference and research to enhance the authenticity and inform the creation of virtual 3D assets.
4. Deliver a portfolio of 3D game assets that demonstrates an appreciation of how artwork should be prepared and presented to prospective employers.

DES206 Description

Operating at the intersection of graphic visual communication design, interaction design, and user research, User Interface (UI) and User Experience (UX) designers hold significant responsibility within game development teams and digital design studios. This module provides an opportunity for students to develop their knowledge, understanding, and skills in UI/UX design, whilst also developing their applied knowledge and understanding of underpinning theories and methodologies.

Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular: Bullet list

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.
• Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.
• Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.
• Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with the theoretical knowledge and practical skills necessary to develop effective user interfaces (UI) and user experiences (UX) underpinned by appreciation of visual communication design, interaction design and user research.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Display fundamental knowledge of visual communication design and their application on user interfaces.
2. Utilise relevant user experience research methods to produce desired design outcomes.
3. Justify and reflect on design decisions based on user experience research as well as existing literature on visual communication, user experience, interface and interaction design.

ART308 Description

This module is designed to enhance students’ ability to engage with theoretical and critical frameworks, to underpin specialist writing relevant to their domain of practice.

Abertay Attributes:

Through engaging with this module, students will develop the Intellectual, Personal, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes.

Intellectual: Students will be supported to develop skills in their chosen specialism. They will be supported to evaluate information critically and rigorously, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.

Personal: Students will undertake activities as part of this module which will support them to be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative, and enterprising.

Professional: Students will be supported to develop portfolios of professional development which will equip and motivate them to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers.

Digital: This module focuses on digital skill development as a tool for their analysis and practice. Students will be supported to develop digital fluency, knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. This will prepare them for the world of work and allow them to understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.

Be active citizens: the module will encourage students to consider personality in context and support them to be inclusive, globally conscientious, and socially respectful, and self-reflective. We will maintain and continuously develop an awareness of their civic, ethical and environmental responsibilities.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the skills and knowledge to enhance their understanding of their field through theoretical and critical thinking underpinned by academic writing.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Ability to identify and read professional and published work in relation to research practice
2. Ability to analyse academic and creative work, in order to analyse the concerns, methods and context of the chosen work
3. Ability to apply appropriate critical frameworks to the analysis and discussion of issues, academic arguments and/or creative practice
4. Ability to relate findings of analysis to the motivations behind the student’s own creative practice

ART310 Description

In this module, students will engage with the creative and technical processes involved in the design and production of game characters, environment, and prop art. Students will develop the ability to analyse, critique and develop 3D assets with consideration for style, aesthetics, narrative and technical implementation. By the end of this project, students will have gained experience in the conceptualisation, planning, construction, and execution of game art across environments, characters and high-fidelity props, which will be particularly beneficial to those who have an interest in progressing into these roles professionally will gain the ability to plan a deep production pipeline suitable for asset production in the video game industry.

Abertay Attributes:

Intellectual: Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.

Professional: Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers.

Personal: Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.

Digital: Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with specialist skills in the critique, design, and art production of game characters, environments and high-fidelity props. This will serve as a space for dedicated specialism in particular 3D practices and allow the student to push their outputs towards ambitious and professional levels.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Conduct visual research and iterative concept development for original game art with a defined visual style.
2. Demonstrate technical and artistic ability in the use of 3D digital methods to create game art assets in-line with industry-recognised best practices.
3. Utilise digital surfacing and construction techniques to instil authenticity, appeal and consistent fidelity within the art they produce.
4. Deliver final work demonstrating an awareness of professional approaches to 3D art presentation and an ability to implement assets in a game engine.

ART311 Description

This module is designed to support students in conceptual, practical and technical skills development relevant to industry best practice within a specialist field of animation production. Students will design and undertake a programme of work that will produce animation content that appreciates the implications of pipelines, team working, technical requirements and creative practice.

Aims

To develop conceptual, technical, practical and professional production knowledge and understanding through the planning and production of an iterated and polished animated outcome

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Design and undertake an animation production project focussed upon a specific form of animation
2. To identify and apply industry best practice in the technical implementation of animation production practices within a specialist field of animation practice
3. demonstrate engagement with iterative practice to develop creative and technical skills
4. produce an animated outcome or an outcome that is supportive of animation production that demonstrates creative and technical ability
5. Critically reflect on production process, project management and creative practice in line with industry practice

ART312 Description

In this module students will advance their knowledge and understanding of the visual development cycle of digital art productions for games. Students will seek to develop a diet of research and practice that is industrially and commercially contextualized, alongside progressing their technical and creative skills. Students will demonstrate their ability to expand on expectations and themes laid out by a creative brief and to concern themselves with effective visual communication to clients and audiences. In addition, students will demonstrate ability with presenting their work and show evidence of their understanding of professional pipeline processes.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with opportunity to develop specialist skills for production of art used in in the creative industries. By the end of this module, students will have demonstrably advanced their proficiency with relevant processes, techniques and expectations of visual development art and design work used in the creative industries.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Conduct advanced visual contextual research into production of commercial art and integrate those contextual understandings in the development of one’s own art pieces
2. Conduct iterative concept development for original art with a defined visual style, demonstrating technical and artistic ability in the use of 2D digital methods
3. Present art and design work to a high standard and deliver final work demonstrating an awareness of professional approaches and pipeline processes to commercial art production
4. Verbally communicate process and design decision making journey through a pitch/presentation

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Computer Game Applications Development course.

Module 1: CMP201 Data Structures and Algorithms 1

Module 2: MAT202 Mathematics for Application Development 2

Module 3: CMP203 Graphics Programming

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Computer Game Applications Development course.

Module 1: CMP301 Graphics Programming with Shaders

Module 2: CMP304 Artificial Intelligence

Module 3: CMP302 Gameplay Mechanics Development

CMP201 Description

Building on students' knowledge of programming facilities taught in Level 7 programming modules (e.g. arrays, structures, simple collections), this module introduces the standard data structures and algorithms that form the core of algorithmic thought in computer science, and introduces students to the idea of reasoning about the behaviour and performance of a computer program.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To familiarise students with the standard data structures and algorithms that underpin software design and development.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe abstract and concrete requirements for data structures and algorithms.
2. Describe a range of standard data structures and algorithms, in terms of both functionality and performance characteristics.
3. By reasoning about behaviour and performance, be able to critically select appropriate data structures and algorithms for a given application within a software project.

Indicative Content
1. Reasoning about performance
The idea of an algorithm, time and space complexity, abstract data types
2. Basic data structures
Linked lists, stacks, queues, hash tables
3. Sorting and searching
Exhaustive and binary search, common sorting algorithms
4. Trees
Simple trees, tree search algorithms, tree representations (XML, JSON)
5. Graphs
Simple and directed graphs, graph algorithms

MAT202 Description

This module builds on Mathematics for Application Development 1 to give CGAD students the mathematical building blocks required for 3-D graphics programming.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the necessary mathematical tools for programming 3-D object characterisations in computer graphics.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Formulate and use transformation matrices (2-D & 3-D) for standard transformations and projections.
2. Determine equations for lines and planes in 3-D, using them to compute distances, projections and intersections.
3. Perform collision detection calculations of rays with boxes and spheres.
4. Apply Newtonian concepts involving momentum, impulse and energy to formulate and solve resulting models.

Indicative Content
1. Viewing Transformations: 2-D viewing transformation matrices, scaling factors, aspect ratios, windows, normalised device screen, viewports.
2. Lines and Planes: Vector (using parameters) and Cartesian equations of 3-D lines and planes. Distances from points to lines and planes. Projection of line onto a plane, intersection of lines and planes.
3. Matrix Transformations: 3-D matrix transformations of scaling, rotation, reflection and translation (homogeneous coordinates). Composite transformation by matrix multiplication.
4. Projection Matrices: Standard orthogonal and perspective matrix transformations.
5. Ray Tracing: Collision detection methods of rays with boxes and spheres.
6. Newtonian Concepts: Newton’s laws of motion. Momentum and impulse, collision of bodies (1-dimensional, elastic and inelastic). Kinetic and potential energy, elastic strings. Work and Power.

CMP203 Description

This module provides an introduction to the principles of 3D graphics programming. Students will develop application that demonstrates real-time 3D graphics.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : Introduce the concepts and features of an API for polygon based rendering. Consolidate knowledge of vector/matrix algebra with programming skills.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate the fundamentals of 3D computer graphics.
2. Design and develop real-time 3D graphics applications.
3. Describe and explain 3D graphics techniques.

Indicative Content
1. The graphics pipeline - Hardware and software functionality and performance.
2. Graphical Primitives - Points, lines and polygons.
3. Coordinate systems - Transformation, projection and hierarchical transforms.
4. Geometry ordering - Depth sorting, Z-buffering and blending.
5. Lighting - Types of lights and related calculations.
6. Texturing - Applying 2D image data to 3D objects.
7. Model processing - Loading and rendering geometry from an external source.
8. Data storage - Techniques for generating and storing 3D geometry data.

CMP301 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of the computer graphics programmable pipeline and various graphics techniques. Students will develop and evaluate techniques used to manipulate 3D graphics in real-time.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the knowledge and core techniques necessary for creating real-time 3D graphics applications utilising the programmable pipeline.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Develop custom shaders.
2. Design and develop real-time 3D graphics applications, demonstrating use of the programmable pipeline.
3. Evaluate graphics programming techniques utilised.

Indicative Content
1. Graphics programming - Introduction to the graphics programmable pipeline
2. Shaders - Creation and use of shaders within the context of the programmable pipeline.
3. Development - Develop applications and shaders which include topics such as lighting, vertex manipulation, post processing and tessellation.

CMP304 Description

This module provides an introduction to some of the many Artificial Intelligence techniques which are currently, or could in the near future, be used to enhance the development of intelligent systems applied to various application domains.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with knowledge of how artificial intelligence techniques can be used effectively within an application environment to provide intelligence and/or the illusion of intelligence.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Develop a critical understanding of AI techniques and technologies.
2. Evaluate the use of AI technologies and techniques in computer games.
3. Design and evaluate a suitable ML/AI solution for a data-driven problem

Indicative Content
1. ‘Traditional’ AI: Rule Based Systems, Finite State Machines.
2. Academic AI Techniques: Fuzzy Logic and Fuzzy State Machines, Case Based Reasoning, Genetic Algorithms, Reinforcement Learning, Probabilistic Techniques, Artificial Neural Networks, Clustering Algorithms.
3. Applications of AI: Combining AI techniques to produce A-life and Intelligent systems.
4. Machine Learning as a subset of A I:The ability of a machine to learn from its environment
5. Evaluating AI/ML applications: The range of metrics available to evaluate AI/ML performance
6. AI/ML pitfals: Awareness of potential issues of inappropriate application of AI/ML

CMP302 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of the principles of formalising, implementing, testing and iterating on functional game mechanics applied in the context of a game engine.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the ability to move from a designed mechanic to creating a finalised implementation. The module will also cover creating statistics from mechanics and play to aid in the iterative design and balance process.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Create and evaluate code design extrapolated from design documentation.
2. Implement functionality within a game engine with testing, metrics and iteration in mind.
3. Design, develop and critically evaluate a complex game mechanic within a games application.

Indicative Content
1. Modern game functionality programming: Review of modern game development with regards to use of game engines and the various methods and levels that game functionality can be implemented.
2. Aspects of Game Design: Theoretical and practical aspects of the game design process derived from established conventions. Analyse a game system from a game theoretical perspective and construction and upkeep of related documentation.
3. From Design to Function: Design interpretation and extrapolation. The process of going from written design to design suitable for engine implementation. Alignment and consideration for correct game engine OO standards. In scripting/visual scripting as well as code.
4. Maintainable Design: Review and evaluation of the aspects of game functionality development relevant to the iteration and evolution of game mechanics and how this integrates with other personnel in the development team.
5. Hardware Integration: Dealing with hardware integration and aligning hardware to work with a game engine and specific game functionality.
6. Data logging, debugging and testing gameplay. Practices and Specifics related to gameplay functionality.
7. Numerical analysis and data for game balancing: Review and evaluation of mathematical techniques and their application to aid in the balancing of gameplay parameters.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Computer Games Technology course.

Module 1: CMP201 Data Structures and Algorithms 1

Module 2: MAT201 Applied Mathematics 2

Module 3: CMP203 Graphics Programming

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Computer Games Technology course.

Module 1: CMP301 Graphics Programming with Shaders

Module 2: CMP304 Artificial Intelligence

Module 3: CMP316 Game Engine Development

CMP201 Description

Building on students' knowledge of programming facilities taught in Level 7 programming modules (e.g. arrays, structures, simple collections), this module introduces the standard data structures and algorithms that form the core of algorithmic thought in computer science, and introduces students to the idea of reasoning about the behaviour and performance of a computer program.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To familiarise students with the standard data structures and algorithms that underpin software design and development.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe abstract and concrete requirements for data structures and algorithms.
2. Describe a range of standard data structures and algorithms, in terms of both functionality and performance characteristics.
3. By reasoning about behaviour and performance, be able to critically select appropriate data structures and algorithms for a given application within a software project.

Indicative Content
1. Reasoning about performance
The idea of an algorithm, time and space complexity, abstract data types
2. Basic data structures
Linked lists, stacks, queues, hash tables
3. Sorting and searching
Exhaustive and binary search, common sorting algorithms
4. Trees
Simple trees, tree search algorithms, tree representations (XML, JSON)
5. Graphs
Simple and directed graphs, graph algorithms

MAT201 Description

This module expands on the concepts of Applied Mathematics 1, on applied mathematics relevant to the Computer Games Technology programme.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: an appreciation of the advanced ideas and techniques in applied mathematics relevant to Computer Games Technology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Use calculus methods to describe/approximate surfaces and to solve optimisation problems.
2. Use the ideas of homogeneous coordinate matrix transformations and quaternions for 3D rotations in computer graphics applications.
3. Use the rays and beams in the modelling of reflection, refraction and collision detection with regular shapes.
4. Solve problems in 1D involving variable acceleration and resistance.
5. Solve problems in 2D, including circular and simple harmonic motion; and elastic collisions.

Indicative Content
1. Calculus - First and second order partial differentiation. Extrema of two variable functions.
2. Matrix and Quaternion Transformations - 3D matrix transformations: translation, scaling, rotation and reflection. Parallel and perspective projections. Complex numbers. Quaternions and their application to rotations about an axis.
3. Vector Curves and Surfaces - Vector geometry of curves and surfaces in space. Tangent planes and normals.
4. Ray Tracing - Intersection of rays with 3D surfaces. Tracing reflected and refracted rays of light in 3D using vectors.
5. Dynamics - Variable velocity and acceleration. Straight−line dynamics with variable forces (e.g. dependent on speed). Circular motion, simple harmonic motion. Oblique impact of objects in 2D.

CMP203 Description

This module provides an introduction to the principles of 3D graphics programming. Students will develop application that demonstrates real-time 3D graphics.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : Introduce the concepts and features of an API for polygon based rendering. Consolidate knowledge of vector/matrix algebra with programming skills.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate the fundamentals of 3D computer graphics.
2. Design and develop real-time 3D graphics applications.
3. Describe and explain 3D graphics techniques.

Indicative Content
1. The graphics pipeline - Hardware and software functionality and performance.
2. Graphical Primitives - Points, lines and polygons.
3. Coordinate systems - Transformation, projection and hierarchical transforms.
4. Geometry ordering - Depth sorting, Z-buffering and blending.
5. Lighting - Types of lights and related calculations.
6. Texturing - Applying 2D image data to 3D objects.
7. Model processing - Loading and rendering geometry from an external source.
8. Data storage - Techniques for generating and storing 3D geometry data.

CMP301 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of the computer graphics programmable pipeline and various graphics techniques. Students will develop and evaluate techniques used to manipulate 3D graphics in real-time.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the knowledge and core techniques necessary for creating real-time 3D graphics applications utilising the programmable pipeline.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Develop custom shaders.
2. Design and develop real-time 3D graphics applications, demonstrating use of the programmable pipeline.
3. Evaluate graphics programming techniques utilised.

Indicative Content
1. Graphics programming - Introduction to the graphics programmable pipeline
2. Shaders - Creation and use of shaders within the context of the programmable pipeline.
3. Development - Develop applications and shaders which include topics such as lighting, vertex manipulation, post processing and tessellation.

CMP304 Description

This module provides an introduction to some of the many Artificial Intelligence techniques which are currently, or could in the near future, be used to enhance the development of intelligent systems applied to various application domains.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with knowledge of how artificial intelligence techniques can be used effectively within an application environment to provide intelligence and/or the illusion of intelligence.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Develop a critical understanding of AI techniques and technologies.
2. Evaluate the use of AI technologies and techniques in computer games.
3. Design and evaluate a suitable ML/AI solution for a data-driven problem

Indicative Content
1. ‘Traditional’ AI: Rule Based Systems, Finite State Machines.
2. Academic AI Techniques: Fuzzy Logic and Fuzzy State Machines, Case Based Reasoning, Genetic Algorithms, Reinforcement Learning, Probabilistic Techniques, Artificial Neural Networks, Clustering Algorithms.
3. Applications of AI: Combining AI techniques to produce A-life and Intelligent systems.
4. Machine Learning as a subset of AI: The ability of a machine to learn from its environment
5. Evaluating AI/ML applications: The range of metrics available to evaluate AI/ML performance
6. AI/ML pitfalls: Awareness of potential issues of inappropriate application of AI/ML

CMP316 Description

This module builds upon previous Computer Games Technology learning and discusses the techniques, patterns, and reality of building modern game and software development from the ground up. You will apply this to forge a stronger meta understanding of how each aspect can be combined into versatile game engines and frameworks that form the foundation of game development. Through engaging with this module, you will develop the Intellectual, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular: • Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied. • Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions • Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online • Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions • Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide students with the ability to critically discuss and implement modern software development techniques toward solving the complex problems inherent in game engine development.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Utilise and critically discuss the libraries, tools, and techniques of modern game development
2. Describe and implement performant and well-organised code to a high standard using professional software development practices
3. Design, implement and evaluate a robust game engine framework that uses appropriate methods, tools and external frameworks and APIs.

Indicative Content
1. Exploration of Game Engines - The history of game engines and an exploration of modern game engines
2. Components of an engine - Overview of the core components of popular game engines and how we can apply these practices to our own work.
3. Game Programming Patterns - A discussion of patterns that we can identify in external code and how we might use these approaches in the construction of software to more efficiently design and build engine architecture.
4. Tools and libraries - A review and discussion of tools and libraries common to game development and how they can be used to take the load off of doing everything from scratch.
5. Resource Management - A game engine requires the management of a complex graph of resources. What are the best practices for ensuring performance and clarity?
6. Object management - To build a game within a custom engine, a developer needs to be able to define and utilise custom defined objects.
7. Timing and events - Reliable and consistent timing of events is core to many video games. This will provide an overview of techniques to ensure this consistency and how we can perform more advanced communication within our code.
8. File management - Games and engines are often required to store complex sets of persistent data. How do we plan and implement this both in game and in engine?

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Computing course.

Module 1: CMP201 Data Structures and Algorithms 1

Module 2: CMP205 Application Design

Module 3: CMP204 Dynamic Web Development 1

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Computing course.

Module 1: CMP306 Dynamic Web Development 2

Module 2: CMP307 Software Engineering Practice

Module 3: Please contact studyabroad@abertay.ac.uk to check other options. Potential options include CMP314 Computer Networking 2 or CMP319 Ethical Hacking 2 from Ethical Hacking, dependent on timetables and your current academic transcript.

CMP201 Description

Building on students' knowledge of programming facilities taught in Level 7 programming modules (e.g. arrays, structures, simple collections), this module introduces the standard data structures and algorithms that form the core of algorithmic thought in computer science, and introduces students to the idea of reasoning about the behaviour and performance of a computer program.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To familiarise students with the standard data structures and algorithms that underpin software design and development.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe abstract and concrete requirements for data structures and algorithms.
2. Describe a range of standard data structures and algorithms, in terms of both functionality and performance characteristics.
3. By reasoning about behaviour and performance, be able to critically select appropriate data structures and algorithms for a given application within a software project.

Indicative Content
1. Reasoning about performance
The idea of an algorithm, time and space complexity, abstract data types
2. Basic data structures
Linked lists, stacks, queues, hash tables
3. Sorting and searching
Exhaustive and binary search, common sorting algorithms
4. Trees
Simple trees, tree search algorithms, tree representations (XML, JSON)
5. Graphs
Simple and directed graphs, graph algorithms

CMP205 Description

This module develops students’ understanding and experience in the design and implementation of object-oriented software and relational databases. In both of these contexts, students will review existing designs, develop their own designs to meet stated requirements, critically evaluate these designs and create example implementations from these designs.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to review, develop, critically evaluate and implement designs in the contexts of object-oriented software and relational databases.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. create entity relationship models reflecting the requirements of application domains;
2. develop and implement OO designs incorporating relevant inheritance, composition and interface relationships that reflect application requirements;
3. develop database designs with associated SQL to meet application data requirements;
4. compare and contrast different software development methodologies, designing and implementing an application within one specific such methodology.

Indicative Content
1. Entity relationship (ER) modelling:
identifying entities; 1-1, 1-many and many-many relationships; design notation; ER in OO software and database design.
2. Relational database design:
Using primary and foreign keys to realise 1-1 and 1-many relationships; link tables for many-many relationships; designing to meet application data requirements; normalisation.
3. SQL:
SQL as a programming language; basic relational algebra; expressing unions and joins; selecting, extracting, editing and inserting data; writing SQL to meet functional requirements.
4. OO software and SQL:
including SQL into OO software; integrating OO software and database designs; realising designs in code.
5. Development methodologies:
the role of a methodology; review different methodologies such as waterfall, RAD, agile, TDD; appraise the role of design within different methodologies.

CMP204 Description

This module introduces the student to dynamic web applications, through client-side and server-side web development.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the necessary skills to develop secure dynamic web applications, providing client-side and server-side interaction.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe and apply web standards using HTTPS, HTML5 and CSS to develop responsive designs.
2. Apply JavaScript, libraries, and frameworks to create effective user interfaces within an appropriate development practice and methodology.
3. Describe and implement dynamic applications that include the use of relevant data persistence, client-side technologies, and server-side technologies.
4. Discuss relevant legal and security issues in relation to dynamic web applications.

Indicative Content
1. Web standards
Application of HTML5 and CSS to develop responsive designs.
2. Client-side technologies
Implementation of JavaScript, libraries, and frameworks to create effective user interfaces within an appropriate development practice and methodology.
3. Design techniques
Appropriate techniques for dynamic web applications.
4. Data persistence
The use of relevant data persistence and consideration of appropriate use.
5. Server-side scripting technologies;
Using server-side technologies to provide functionality. Consideration of the processes involved, and the benefits/drawbacks of processing on the server.
6. Security and legal issues
Consider legal and security issues including privacy, transparency, data protection, GDPR, authorisation and validation.
7. Practical aspects of security
Appropriate use of network protocols, secure programming, and testing strategies.

CMP306 Description

Students will develop an understanding of web application development, by learning to create a database back-end and related server-side scripts. Key concepts in web application development such as security will be elucidated. Throughout the module the need for a professional approach to web application design and development will be emphasised

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the necessary skills to enable them to develop complex database driven web applications, effectively employing server side technology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Plan and implement an effective web application supporting database transactions using a server based database management system.
2. Design and develop a standards compliant web application utilising a back end engine that integrates parsed HTML and dynamic data.
3. Critically evaluate different design issues in building complex database driven internet solutions.
4. Evaluate web application development from the perspective of security and countermeasures.

Indicative Content
1. Dynamic Site Basics.
Write sites in HTML5 supported by CSS with a framework (eg. Bootstrap). Design and implement a database to store data in relational form; use PHP to extract data and deliver to the web page. Use of Javascript.
2. Database Management Systems:Server-Side Scripting
Examine issues such as concurrency and distributed database, OO, SQL and NoSQL.Using techniques to develop a structured approach to scripting. Use of prepared statements to enforce secure scripting. Understanding of the MVC architecture and separation of Model, View Controller. Use of API and Web Services to deliver content from the database.
3. Web Application Architectures:Security
Explore the 3−tier architecture and techniques of ensuring the separation of these tiers. Management of sites to allow interface changes without affecting the processing or databaseRunning through the whole module is the idea of secure coding. Main threats to the security of dynamic web applications and their data. Implement countermeasures to security threats within the context of differing types of application.
4. Databases
Appropriate use of the Relational database model to store data for dynamic web sites. Alternative models including NoSQL database model.
5. JSON
JavaScript Object Model - Use of JSON as a data description language. Using JSON to deliver data between applications and servers. XML as an alternative.
6. State Management within HTTP
Use of Cookies in web development. Sessions and session management. Client Management and Application Management within PHP. Examination of different models from other technologies.
7. Client-Side Scripting
Review of Javascript as a client side language. Use of frameworks such as JQuery and AngularJS. Extension to Javascript server side development.
8. AJAX - RIA
Use of AJAX to develop web pages. Single page Web Applications using AJAX (RIA). Especially building Mobile Web Apps.
9. Internet of Things
Basic architecture of node / sensor domain, database and application domain. Creation of big data; upload to servers. Interrogation of servers to get information on the mobile device.
10. Mobile Internet Sites
Creation of mobile internet sites. Inclusion of special features that make the mobile more appropriate especially location.

CMP307 Description

This module develops students’ understanding and experience in design/programming within a software engineering context.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to review, critically evaluate and apply software engineering practice in the development of object-oriented software solutions.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Explain, compare and contrast software development methodologies such as waterfall, agile and continuous delivery;
2. Describe and apply Code construction concepts including coupling, cohesion, test-driven development and source control;
3. Describe and apply design principles and design patterns;
4. Explain and use Secure coding practices.

Indicative Content
1. Software engineering (SE):
What is SE? Application to development process; application to programming practices.
2. SE Development methodologies:
Agile development; Waterfall Model; Continuous delivery.
3. Source control:
Strategies; tools; git.
4. Code construction issues:
Design concepts: Coupling and Cohesion; test-driven development.
5. Unified Modelling Language (UML):
Use case diagrams; Sequence diagrams; Class diagrams; State-machine diagrams; Activity diagrams;
6. Patterns
Pattern catalogues; reviewing a pattern; strategy pattern; observer pattern and variants; pattern implementation.
7. Secure OO coding practices:
Identifying coding vulnerabilities; types of exploits; protection through good programming practice; use of assertions
8. Protecting against the user:
Full input verification & validation; handling passwords and encryption; avoiding information leakage via uncaught exceptions.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Criminology course.

Module 1: CRM204 Criminological Theories

Module 2: SOC201 Classical Social Theory

Module 3: CRM211 Introduction to Policing

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Criminology course.

Module 1: CRM305 Penal Institutions

Module 2: SOC320 Social Research in Action 3

Module 3: CRM311 Cybercrime & Policing Technology 

CRM204 Description

This module addresses the emergence and development of key criminological perspectives of continuing relevance for the understanding of crime and processes of criminalization.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with: a detailed understanding and effective appreciation of criminological theories that address issues of crime, processes of criminalization and structures of power within the context of wider social, cultural and political change.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Use their understanding of a criminological theory to interpret a contemporary area of crime, criminality and / or criminal justice.
2. Assess criminological theories that contextualize and explain social-embedded and social-determined nature of crime, deviance and conformity.
3. Assess criminological theories that contextualize and explain the role of structures of power and broader historical historical and social changes in shaping processes of criminalization.
4. Identify the ways in which criminological theories are shaped by the historical, social and political contexts of their development.

Indicative Content
1. Modernity and socio-cultural formation: Functionalism and strain, the Chicago School and subcultural theory, theories of social disorganization
2. Interaction and structure: Labelling and interactionism, Marxist and radical perspectives, left realism
3. Criminological pessimism and pragmatism: Right realism, rational actor perspectives and situational crime prevention
4. Late modernity and reflexivity: Cultural criminology and green criminology

SOC201 Description

This module is intended to introduce the work of three key social theorists of the 19th and early 20th centuries, Karl Marx, Max Weber and Emile Durkheim. Their work is used to critically illustrate the nature of capitalist modernity and the foundations of contemporary sociological theory and practice.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with :working knowledge of the principle ideas of the key contributors to the foundations of sociological thought.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of the philosophical influences upon the key contributors to the foundation of sociological thought.
2. Illustrate an understanding of how each thinker interpreted the impact of modern capitalist society upon the 'human condition'.
3. Articulate an understanding of how each thinker used different methodologies to analyse and explain the nature of social cohesion and social conflict.
4. Display an ability to effectively communicate the similarities and differences between the key classical sociological thinkers.
5. Critically assess the significance of the classical thinkers' social theory in the analysis of contemporary society.

Indicative Content
1. KARL MARX
Capitalism, Workers` Movement and The Communist Manifesto (1848); Dialectics, Fetishism and the Purpose of Critique; Value, Labour, Money; Capital, Surplus Value and Exploitation; Primitive Accumulation, the Logic of Separation and the Question of Crisis; Class Struggle, Revolution and Communism.
2. MAX WEBER
Introduction: contextual overview and biography; The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism; Conception of sociology and methodology; Bureaucratisation and rationalisation; Class, status and party; Political sociology: power, legitimacy and the state.
3. EMILE DURKHEIM
Introduction: contextual overview and biography; The Rules of Sociological Method; Suicide; The Division of Labour in Society; Morality and Religion; Crime, Deviance and the Law.

CRM211 Description

This module introduces students to key issues and debates in the history and development of contemporary policing in the UK.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with Knowledge and understanding of the social and historical development of policing and of the changing values that govern policework.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify and recognise different police cultures in their historical and contemporary setting through working collaboratively and individually to understand changing responses to crime
2. Confidently evaluate changes in policing practices and assess the implications for policework in diverse societies
3. Recognise and identify new and emergent forms of private and state policing and develop reasoned arguments about the challenges this poses for public policing.
4. Critically examine and enquire about changing values and relationships between individuals, groups, public and private policing agencies and the wider social structure.

Indicative Content
1. History of the Police - 'Policing before the police'; from 'Peelers' to 'crime fighters' to 'risk managers' to 'knowledge workers'; models of policing.
2. Policing structures and systems - What do policing structures look like? How is the service organised? Hierarchies; police powers, police cultures; policing and the media, myth and reality.
3. Police operations - Introducing, analysing and investigating crime; policing styles revisited; crime reduction and/or community safety; responding to terrorism; organised crime
4. Key debates in contemporary policing - Governance; accountability; ethics; performance management; policing 'futures'; surveillance.

CRM305 Description

This module provides knowledge and understanding of the prison system, the experience of imprisonment and penal policy and practice in the UK and Internationally.

Aims

To provide the student with the opportunity to explore developments in penal policy and practice, the lived experience of imprisonment and considers alternatives to imprisonment.It will also consider some of the issues surrounding detention and incarceration for foreign nationals.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Collaborate with other students in discussion and presentation to critically assess and evaluate penal policy in modern British society.
2. Critically assess the effect of imprisonment as a form of punishment on prisoners and their families through detailed enquiry based learning on the challenges that confront them.
3. Identify and assess the effectiveness of alternatives to custody through confidently using and evaluating statistical evidence on alternative disposals.
4. Critically examine the complex nature of attitudes to imprisonment and challenge thinking on penal abolition and punitive discourses.
5. Critically examine the growing concerns relating to the detention of foreign nationals in the UK

Indicative Content
1. Contemporary developments in Penal Theory, Policy & Practice: Penal institutions in contemporary society.The crises of legitimacy in penal institutions. Reorganisation and reform. Privatisation of the prison system.
2. Prison Life The Reality: 'Doing time' the actuality of prison life, the 'total institution'? Strategies for survival, regime activities, 'banged up' prisoners, prison staff and civilian staff. Dealing with social exclusion. The diversity of the prison population. Stratification and power within prisons.
3. Alternatives to Imprisonment; The Way Forward?: Reducing risk or protecting the public? Reducing fear of crime? Human or humane containment and warehousing. Therapeutic prisons. Electronic tagging, community service orders, mediation/reparation.
4. Attitudes to imprisonment: Why do we have prisons? Why are they at the centre of penal policy? Are they culturally 'acceptable'? Abolitionism
5. Foreign Nationals: Detention centres; foreign national prisoners and race relations in prisons; are immigration detention centres new types of penal establishments; critical issues surrounding foreign national prisoners in the UK

CRM302 Description

This module introduces students to key issues and debates in the history and development of contemporary policing in the UK.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with Knowledge and understanding of the social and historical development of policing and of the changing values that govern policework.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Identify and recognise different police cultures in their historical and contemporary setting through working collaboratively and individually to understand changing responses to crime.
2. Confidently evaluate changes in policing practices and assess the implications for policework in diverse societies.
3. Recognise and identify new and emergent forms of private and state policing and develop reasoned arguments about the challenges this poses for public policing.
4. Critically examine and enquire about changing values and relationships between individuals, groups, public and private policing agencies and the wider social structure.

Indicative Content
1. The History of the Police
'Policing before the police'; from 'Peelers' to 'crime fighters' to 'risk managers' to 'knowledge workers'; models of policing
2. Policing Structures and Systems
What do policing structures look like? How is the service organised? Hierarchies; police powers, police cultures; policing and the media, myth and reality
3. Police Operations
Analysing and investigating crime; policing styles revisited; crime reduction and/or community safety; responding to terrorism; organised crime
4. Key Debates in Contemporary Policing
Governance; accountability; ethics; performance management; policing 'futures'; surveillance

SOC320 Description

This module offers students an array of advanced qualitative and quantitative analytical tools as the basis for an understanding of how social researchers generate knowledge. It provides a critical understanding of the philosophical basis of social scientific research as well as providing a platform upon which students can plan their undergraduate dissertation should they wish to conduct empirical work. The focus is firmly upon analysis and develops the skills in data collection acquired in module SOC220.

Aims

The module has three aims: (a) To provide students with a critical understanding of the philosophy of social research; (b) To equip students with an understanding of how to conduct qualitative analyses involving textual, oral and visual material; and (c) To also equip students with an understanding of basic regression techniques in statistics and how to apply these to analyse, and make inferences from, existing quantitative datasets relevant to social scientific research.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. possess a critical understanding of the philosophy of social research
2. understand how to conduct a discourse analysis of both textual and spoken material.
3. understand how to conduct ethnographic research derived from online and observational data.
4. understand important techniques of statistical analysis applicable to quantitative social science research.
5. apply appropriate statistical techniques to a quantitative dataset and analyse the results to draw critically informed, well-supported social scientific conclusions.

CRM311 Description

Using a perspective that sees technologies as socially constructed this module introduces students to the study of cybercrime and policing technologies, in particular looking at Digital Technologies

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with a critical understanding of cybercrime and policing technologies in the contemporary world and their effect on the lives of individuals and groups. The module will focus, in particular, on Digital Technologies and their role in both policing and crime. The module uses a perspective that sees technologies as socially constructed and encourages students to approach the study of technologies as socio-technical assemblages. With this perspective and relevant case studies presented in lectures and readings, students will be encouraged to reflexively challenge the boundaries of technology and society, applying confident and creative thinking to academic and policing debates.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate knowledge of the social construction of technologies.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of cybercrime.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of policing technology.
4. Critically explore and understand how digital technologies change how we conceptualise crime and policing.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Ethical Hacking course.

Module 1: CMP201 Data Structures and Algorithms 1

Module 2: CMP210 Penetration Testing

Module 3: CMP204 Secure Web Development 

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Ethical Hacking course.

Module 1: CMP314 Computer Networking 2

Module 2: CMP319 Web Application Penetration Testing

Module 3: Please contact studyabroad@abertay.ac.uk to check other options. Potential options include CMP306 and CMP307 from Computing, dependent on timetables and your current academic transcript.

CMP201 Description

Building on students' knowledge of programming facilities taught in Level 7 programming modules (e.g. arrays, structures, simple collections), this module introduces the standard data structures and algorithms that form the core of algorithmic thought in computer science, and introduces students to the idea of reasoning about the behaviour and performance of a computer program.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To familiarise students with the standard data structures and algorithms that underpin software design and development.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe abstract and concrete requirements for data structures and algorithms.
2. Describe a range of standard data structures and algorithms, in terms of both functionality and performance characteristics.
3. By reasoning about behaviour and performance, be able to critically select appropriate data structures and algorithms for a given application within a software project.

Indicative Content
1. Reasoning about performance
The idea of an algorithm, time and space complexity, abstract data types
2. Basic data structures
Linked lists, stacks, queues, hash tables
3. Sorting and searching
Exhaustive and binary search, common sorting algorithms
4. Trees
Simple trees, tree search algorithms, tree representations (XML, JSON)
5. Graphs
Simple and directed graphs, graph algorithms

CMP210 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of the tools used by Ethical Hackers to examine the security of a device or network. Students will systematically investigate a computer network for possible vulnerabilities.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to assess the security of a computer system.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Undertake research to select appropriate methods of investigating the security of a computer network.
2. Evaluate and assess the security of a typical computer system.
3. Document details of an ethical hacking methodology.

CMP204 Description

This module introduces the student to dynamic web applications, through client-side and server-side web development on a full-stack platform.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with the necessary skills to develop secure dynamic web applications on a full-stack platform, covering client-side and server-side interaction.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Describe and apply web standards using HTTPS, HTML5 and CSS to develop responsive designs.
2. Apply JavaScript, libraries, and frameworks to create effective user interfaces within an appropriate development practice and methodology.
3. Describe and implement dynamic applications that include the use of relevant data persistence, client-side technologies, and server-side technologies.
4. Discuss relevant legal and security issues in relation to dynamic web applications.

CMP314 Description

This module introduces the ideas and concepts of how computers, mobile devices and gadgets communicate via a wide range of communications technologies with each other and other devices. This will include interactions via technologies such as Ethernet, VLANS, STP, Wireless, Routing, Subnetting, IPv6, SNMP, DHCP, DNS, Firewalls and Network Management

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the key technologies used by computer devices to communicate with each other, along with the skills required to analyse weakness’s in the current technologies and propose solutions that would help to stop the weaknesses.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of the communications technologies which can be used to communicate between network devices.
2. Critically evaluate the security of a range of technologies used for communicating in a network.
3. Appreciate the issues of network design and management

Indicative Content
1. VLANS
Describe the core concept of VLANS and trunking along with the common attacks that can be used against them
2. STP
Investigate how STP can be used to create a loop free network and how this can be exploited by an attacker
3. Static Routing
Examine how routing works and show it can be used for pivoting deeper into a network
4. Subnetting and Variable Length Subnet Masks
Classful and classless addressing. Benefits and impact on routing protocols. Design of LANs using VLSM techniques
5. Network Application protocols
Investigation into various networking protocols used at the application layer of the OSI model along with common security weaknesses.
6. Firewalls
Software and hardware firewalls - their application, uses and how to counter them.
7. Intrusion Detection Systems
Examine how Intrusion detection systems work and how they can be bypassed
8. Network Management
Examine network management protocols (Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP) and current practice

CMP319 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of advanced techniques used by Ethical Hackers to examine the security of web applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of advanced computer hacking and the countermeasures that a company can take to minimise their effect.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Analyse and critically evaluate techniques used to break into an insecure web application and identify relevant countermeasures.
2. Critically evaluate specific countermeasures to advanced hacking techniques
3. Demonstrate a critical evaluation of an advanced security topic with an independent project.

Indicative Content
1. Web Application Security
Core Defence Mechanisms. Handling User Access, Authentication, Session Management, Access Control.
2. Web Application Technologies
HTTP Protocol, Requests, Responses and Methods. Encoding schemes. Server side functionality technologies (Java, ASP, PHP).
3. Injecting Code
Attacking SQL Servers, Sniffing, Brute Forcing and finding Application Configuration Files, Input validation attacks. Preventive Measures.
4. Bypassing Client Side Controls
Manipulating cookies, URL parameters, ActiveX controls, Shockwave controls.
5. Attacking Authentication
Attacking Session Management, Design Flaws in Authentication Mechanisms Attacking Forgotten Password Functionality, attacking Password change functions. Countermeasures to authentication attacks
6. XSS
Reflected XSS Vulnerabilities, Stored XSS Vulnerabilities, DOM-Based XSS Vulnerabilities, HTTP Header Injection. Countermeasures to XSS.
7. Web Server Security
Popular web servers and common security threats. Attacks against IIS and Apache. Increasing web server security. Countermeasures (e.g. correct Web Application Set-up).

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Fitness, Nutrition and Health course.

Module 1: FOD205 Nutrition through the Lifespan

Module 2: SPS203 Key Concepts in Sport and Exercise Physiology

Module 3: FOD203 Food Design and Promotion

Option 2

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Fitness, Nutrition and Health course.

Module 1: FOD305 Clinical Nutrition 1

Module 2: FOD304 Food and Behaviour

Module 3: SPS314 Health Related Fitness Assessment and Programming 

FOD205 Description

In this module nutrient needs, nutritional status and associated nutritional issues are explored using a lifespan model.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of life-cycle nutritional needs, the importance of suitable food choices to meet these needs and the potential influence of early diet and food choice on health throughout the lifespan.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Explain nutritional requirements at different stages of the lifespan.
2. Discuss the relationship between diet and health status at different life stages.
3. Evaluate factors that may affect nutritional status throughout the lifecycle.
4. Apply practical guidelines for menu planning and food preparation provision relevant to different stages of the lifespan

Indicative Content
1. Nutrition during the lifecycle
2. Nutrition during pregnancy and lactation
3. Nutrition during infancy
4. Nutrition in childhood
5. Nutrition in adolescence
6. Nutrition in adulthood
7. Nutrition in aging
8. Nutrition and sports

SPS203 Description

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise physiology and the application to performance, exercise and health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of core bioenergetic processes related to sport, exercise and health.
2. . Explain the role of the endocrine system in exercise and performance.
3. Explain the cardiovascular and respiratory response during exercise.
4. 4. Develop an understanding of fatigue and lactate metabolism in relation to exercise performance.
5. Develop key skills in research through data collection, analysis and interpretation.

Indicative Content
1. Fundamentals of bioenergetics
Students will explore the core concepts of energy production during exercise, examining the interaction of the different energy systems during exercise and how these change with inactivity.
2. Regulation of energy systems
Students will learn about hormonal and neural factors that influence the availability and regulation of fuel metabolism at rest and during exercise in health and disease.
3. Cardiovascular and respiratory system in sport and exercise
Students will learn about the determinants of exercising muscle oxygenation and its regulation by the cardiovascular and respiratory system, the regulation of arterial blood pressure during exercise and the interaction between oxygenation and arterial blood pressure.
4. Fatigue
Students will develop an understanding of both neuromuscular and skeletal muscle fatigue and the potential mechanisms resulting in the development of fatigue.
5. Physiological Testing
Students will explore a number of physiological tests that are used routinely for health assessment, developing an understanding of the tests and their limitations. Students will also learn how to carry out different physiological tests and analyse and interpret the results.

FOD203 Description

A practical based module in which students develop an understanding of functionality of food ingredients and develop food handling skills and apply them in the design and promotion of a multi component food recipe.

Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Maintain and continuously develop awareness of their civic, ethical and environmental responsibilities.
• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of how food ingredients interact with each other, to develop the knowledge and skills to make and modify complex food products, and to develop confidence in presenting and promoting food.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Develop knowledge of the functionality of ingredients in foods.
2. Apply skills and techniques to modify foods and create alternatives to fulfil a specified brief and present through a food demonstration.
3. Justify the principles of HACCP in the food supply chain, i.e. the importance of it within the food industry.
4. Understand underpinning food science and nutrition

FOD305 Description

This module provides the students with knowledge about interactions of nutrients with other components (non-nutrient food components; gene and drug interactions). The module gives also information about methods used for assessment of the nutritional status and an introduction to nutritional genomics. Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal and Digital Abertay Attributes. In particular: •Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness. •Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to •Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising. •Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding about different factors that can interfere with nutrients in the body.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate the interaction nutrient / non-nutrient food components of food and their metabolic activity
2. Discuss nutrient-drug interaction & nutrient-gene interaction
3. Critically evaluate laboratory / biochemical parameters used to assess nutritional status

FOD304 Description

Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal and Digital Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide students with the ability to critically investigate the underlying consumer issues for a number of nutrition related public health issues

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate, from an evidence base, food-related public health concerns from a scientific perspective
2. Appraise the role of epidemiological, psychological and physiological factors that prevent consumers making healthy food choices
3. Have a working knowledge of different methodologies to examine factors involved in food choice
4. Appraise the usefulness of strategies to support better consumer diets and food choices

SPS314 Description

In this module students will learn the principles of assessment and exercise programming, examine acute and chronic outcomes of training to improve health and undertake several physiological/fitness tests. Students will also learn how to use the fitness tests results to plan, implement and evaluate individualised and safe evidence-based exercise programmes that will help clients achieve their health goals. Through engaging with this module you will also develop the intellectual, professional, personal and digital Abertay attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied;
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers;
• Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives;
• Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the theoretical/scientific basis as well as practical skills necessary to design and undertake health-related fitness testing and programming.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the theoretical and scientific basis of health related fitness testing and training.
2. Explain and critique acute and chronic responses to exercise.
3. Critically appraise and be proficient in a range of assessments of health related fitness.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Food and Consumer Science and Food, Nutrition and Health courses.

Module 1: FOD203 Food Design and Promotion

Module 2: FOD205 Nutrition through the Lifespan

Module 3: SPS203 Key Concepts in Sport and Exercise Physiology 

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Food and Consumer Science and Food, Nutrition and Health courses.

Choose three from the following options:

FOD303 Food Processing

FOD304 Food and Behaviour

FOD305 Clinical Nutrition 1

FOD306 Safety Management Systems

FOD309 Food Properties and Functionalities

FOD310 Professional Skills for Placement and Research

FOD403 New Product Development 1

SPS314 Health Related Fitness Assessment and Programming

FOD203 Description

A practical based module in which students develop an understanding of functionality of food ingredients and develop food handling skills and apply them in the design and promotion of multi component food recipes

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of how food ingredients interact with each other, to develop the knowledge and skills to make and modify complex food products, and to develop confidence in presenting and promoting food.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Develop knowledge of the functionality of ingredients in foods.
2. Apply skills and techniques to modify foods and create alternatives to fulfil a specified brief
3. Plan and develop a multicomponent recipe and present a food demonstration justifying ingredient choice and functionality.
4. Understand underpinning food science and nutrition

Indicative Content
1. Fundamental Food Handling and demonstration Skills
Fundamental food handling skills and understanding of how ingredients interact in recipes. Develop ability to modify recipes in order to confidently prepare and demonstrate multi-component recipes
2. Theoretical underpinning of recipe development for specific groups
Food Ingredients, recipe modification and recipe writing, nutritional guidelines Food demonstration skills

FOD205 Description

In this module nutrient needs, nutritional status and associated nutritional issues are explored using a lifespan model.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of life-cycle nutritional needs, the importance of suitable food choices to meet these needs and the potential influence of early diet and food choice on health throughout the lifespan.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Explain nutritional requirements at different stages of the lifespan.
2. Discuss the relationship between diet and health status at different life stages.
3. Evaluate factors that may affect nutritional status throughout the lifecycle.
4. Apply practical guidelines for menu planning and food preparation provision relevant to different stages of the lifespan

Indicative Content
1. Nutrition during the lifecycle
2. Nutrition during pregnancy and lactation
3. Nutrition during infancy
4. Nutrition in childhood
5. Nutrition in adolescence
6. Nutrition in adulthood
7. Nutrition in aging
8. Nutrition and sports

SPS203 Description

This module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise physiology and the application to sport and exercise. The focus is on bioenergetics, fatigue and exercise in special populations. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Digital and Personal Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, and practical.
• Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise physiology and the application to sport and exercise.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Explain the role of the endocrine system in exercise, health and performance.
2. Demonstrate an understanding of core bioenergetic processes related to sport and exercise.
3. Develop an understanding of fatigue in relation to exercise performance.
4. Understand and explain the cardiovascular response to endurance exercise.
5. Develop an understanding of exercise testing with various populations
6. Develop key skills in research through data collection, analysis and interpretation.

FOD303 Description

This module introduces the student to the basic unit operations and food processing technologies used in food and drink manufacturing industry.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the necessary knowledge and skills to enable students to critically evaluate processing and preserving technologies used in the food and drink manufacturing industry.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Develop typical process flow diagrams for food products and have a comprehensive understanding of the unit operations employed
2. Evaluate a range of food manufacturing and processing methods
3. Critically discuss innovative technologies within the food industry
4. Evaluate the steps involved in the commercial manufacture of complex food products
5. Efficiently work in small teams (fully engaging in Peer teaching and learning) and understanding the key points of a given processing challenge

Indicative Content
Basic processing concepts for example: Heat transfer; thermal properties of food, modes of heat transfer, modes of heating; mass balance; flow of liquids; size reduction and mixing

FOD304 Description

A practical module providing research tools and theoretical enquiry into consumer orientated reasons for poor dietary choices and the potential technical and psychological solutions.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with the ability to critically investigate the underlying consumer issues for a number of nutrition related public health issues

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Evaluate, from an evidence base, food-related public health concerns from a consumer perspective
2. Appraise the role of epidemiological, psychological and physiological factors that prevent consumers making healthy food choices
3. Have a working knowledge of different methodologies to examine factors involved in food choice
4. Appraise the usefulness of technological strategies to support better consumer food choices

Indicative Content
1. Satiety/obesity and CVD explored in terms of drivers of consumption: 
Genetic and ageing differences in sensory perception explored. Supertasters (bitter reception/ fat taste – CD36) Chewing strategies and satietyBiomarkers, hormones and receptors e.g. satiety Cognitive factors] Sociological approach
2. Research methods: Methodological review of techniques – strengths and weaknesses. e.g. Attitudinal scoring does it predict behaviour ? Working knowledge on a variety of techniques Basic report writing skills. Accuracy, Data presentation and analysis, Experimental critique, and Report Structure
3. Solutions/interventions: Psychological, medical and technical solutions investigated

FOD305 Description

This module provide the students with knowledge about interactions of nutrients with other components (non-nutrient food components; gene and drug interactions). The module gives also information about methods used for assessment of the nutritional status and an introduction to nutritional genomics.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding about different factors that can interfere with nutrients in the body.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Evaluate the interaction nutrient / non-nutrient food components of food and their metabolic activity
2. Discuss nutrient-drug interaction & nutrient-gene interaction
3. Critically evaluate laboratory / biochemical parameters used to assess nutritional status

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to nutritional genomics
1.1 – Genetic fundamentals 1.2 – Genetics and Nutrition (Nutrigenomics & Nutrigenetics)
2. Food-Drug interactions
2.1 – Drug use and nutritional Status 2.2 – Drug effects on Food and Nutrients 2.3 – Food and Nutrient effects on drugs 2.4 – Alcohol (as a drug)- absorption, metabolism and effects on health
3. Non-nutrient components in foods
3.1 – Bioactives and their metabolic activity 3.2 – Main Classes of anti-nutrients and their effect on nutrient’s bioavailability 3.3 – Adverse reactions to Food/Food components
4. Functional Foods
4.1 – Definition of Functional Foods and their health benefits 4.2 – Functional Foods (Prebiotics and Probiotics) 4.3 - Functional Components
5. Laboratory data in nutrition assessment
5.1 – Indicators of Protein-Energy Malnutrition (undernutrition- starvation and chronic undernutrition) 5.2 – Inflammation and Biochemical Assessment 5.3 – Markers of vitamins status (overview of function and deficiency) 5.4 – Markers of iron status (overview of function and deficiency)

FOD306 Description

The module deals with issues related to the management of food safety and quality systems in food environments, throughout the food supply chain

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the principles and the application of food safety and hygiene management systems and methodologies.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Justify the principles of HACCP in the food supply chain; i.e. the importance of it within the food industry
2. Ascertain the application of risk assessment methodologies in the quantification of hazards
3. Critically analyse the key components of food safety failures from an economic, health and societal point of view.
4. Critique food manufacturers use of quality management systems, including quality standards.
5. Determine the food legislation issues and controls related to food safety

Indicative Content
1. Contamination of foods and its prevention
Bacteriology, physical, chemical and microbiological contamination of food and its prevention. Carry out risk analysis, identify hazards and indicate suitable controls;
2. Safety management
Assessment of existing HACCP plans, design and implementation of new HACCP plans and safety management systems;
3. Legislation and other requirements
Food Safety Act 1990, EC Regulations, Food Hygiene (Scotland) Regulations, FSA, European Food Safety Authority, BRC and ISO standards, hygienic design of food premises

FOD309 Description

his module provides the students with concepts underpinning physical and organic chemistry related to food components. Core topics include: chemistry numeracy, food chemistry focusing on carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, micronutrients, food additives and fortification, as well as chemical reactions that occur during cooking, preparation, preservation and storage of foods.

This module also develops food analysis and scientific writing skills. Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal and Digital Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.

Aims

This module is to provide the students with scientific knowledge aimed at understanding the physicochemical characteristics and functionalities of food components. The module also explores the physical and chemical alterations that occur during food production, preparation, cooking, preservation, fortification and storage, which lead to changes in appearance, texture, flavour, and nutritional quality of human food and diet. This module is supported by practical laboratory sessions, which emphasise analytical and instrumental techniques.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Compare the physical structure and chemical nature of food components, and their functional properties.
2. Evaluate the physicochemical changes and interactions of food components during production, preparation, cooking, preservation, fortification and storage, and their effects on food characteristics
3. Perform scientific experiments to observe, collect, statistically analyse and interpret data of chemical changes in food.
4. Demonstrate competent lab report writing skills.

FOD310 Description

This module is aimed at preparing the student for the Placement period and to develop research skills.

Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency with confidence to embrace digital solutions in different contexts including the ability to learn online.
• Be inclusive, socially respectful, and self-reflective, continuously developing awareness of civic, ethical and environmental responsibilities.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an opportunity to reflect on their current professional competencies and develop their professional/research skills and knowledge further.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Justify key food and nutrition principles in preparation for placement.- Justify key food and nutrition principles in preparation for placement.
2. Ascertain the application of risk assessments through the food and nutrition sector. -Ascertain the application of risk assessments through the food and nutrition sector.
3. Develop competencies in designing qualitative and quantitative research. - Develop competencies in designing qualitative and quantitative research.
4. Develop employability skills through self-assessment and reflection. - Develop employability skills through self-assessment and reflection.

FOD403 Description

This is a project based module where qualitative and quantitative techniques will be applied to develop innovative fast moving consumer goods (FMCG) concepts and a supportive business plan. Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal and Digital Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.

Aims

To equip students with the skills for conducting product development projects (up to concept and businesses plan stage) in the FMCG industry.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Appraise the various steps in a new product development program and critique its usefulness for various types of innovation
2. Design a FMCG NPD project up to the concept and business plan stage.
3. Critically evaluate the types of consumer / marketing tests / surveys for NPD and defend the selection and running of appropriate test
4. Develop and write an effective concept and business plan including financial evaluation

SPS314 Description

In this module students will learn the principles of assessment and exercise programming, examine acute and chronic outcomes of training to improve health and undertake several physiological/fitness tests. Students will also learn how to use the fitness tests results to plan, implement and evaluate individualised and safe evidence-based exercise programmes that will help clients achieve their health goals. Through engaging with this module you will also develop the intellectual, professional, personal and digital Abertay attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied;
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers;
• Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives;
• Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the theoretical/scientific basis as well as practical skills necessary to design and undertake health-related fitness testing and programming.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the theoretical and scientific basis of health related fitness testing and training.
2. Explain and critique acute and chronic responses to exercise.
3. Critically appraise and be proficient in a range of assessments of health related fitness

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Forensic Sciences course.

Module 1: FOR205 Human Identification

Module 2: PSY203 Forensic Psychology: Understanding Offending Behaviour

Module 3: FOR213 Forensic Quality, Professional Practice & Work Based Learning  

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Forensic Sciences course.

Module 1: FOR301 Special Topics in Forensic Biology

Module 2: FOR303 Forensic Chromatography and Spectroscopy

Module 3: FOR309 Firearms, Fires and ExplosionsPSY203 Description

FOR205 Description

This module will focus on the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process and introduce students to the use of biometric information, not just for personal security, but also in a forensic capacity for the purposes of human identification.

Through engaging with this module, you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Personal and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes, in particular:

• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers
• Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives
• Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective

Aims

The aims of this module are to provide students with knowledge and understanding of biometric information, how it can be used in a forensic capacity for human identification, and to develop an understanding of the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Discuss the use of biometric data and its role in human identification, particularly in the context of criminal investigation and mass fatality incidents.
2. Demonstrate a sound knowledge and awareness of the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process.
3. Discuss the process of post mortem (PM) examinations and their value in forensic investigations.
4. Recognise the importance of a systematic approach to the identification of disaster victims.
5. Select appropriate documentation for forensic productions related to DVI.

PSY203 Description

Forensic psychology is a constantly growing discipline and covers an exciting and broad range of topics. This module will examine key issues in forensic psychology integrating information from clinical, biological, developmental, personality, social and cognitive psychology. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.
• Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with a comprehensive overview of Forensic Psychology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Assess the impact of environmental, family, cultural and peer influences on criminal behaviour.
2. Demonstrate an awareness of risk prediction and the basis for interventions with offenders.
3. Demonstrate an understanding of factors that increase the likelihood of serious and violent behaviour.
4. Describe and evaluate key developmental and genetic models of criminal psychopathology.
5. Understand methodological challenges associated with forensic psychology research.

FOR213 Description

Students will learn how a wide range of evidence requires cross-disciplinary collaboration from crime scene to court. In this module students will learn how forensic practitioners interact with the UK legal system, the importance of quality assurance in forensic work and the associated guidance issued by the forensic science regulator in the UK. Through engaging with this module, students will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

Aims

The aim of this module is for students to understand the legal, regulatory and quality environment that forensic practitioners operate in and to immerse themselves in the key aspects of this multi-disciplinary practice. These issues will be reinforced, where resources permit, via work-based learning.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand how different disciplines and skills contribute to the complexity of forensic practice.
2. Describe how UK legal systems relate to forensic practice and apply the guidance from the UK Forensic Science Regulator to forensic practices.
3. Describe the importance of a range of quality standards in forensics.
4. Apply knowledge on quality standards to create standard operating procedures to maintain uniformity in performance.
5. Use work-based learning to reflect and evaluate one’s own development.

FOR301 Description

This module provides an introduction to the identification and confirmation of body fluids in forensic biology casework and the scientific interpretation of blood stain patterns. The contribution of further selected areas of the biological sciences to specialised aspects of forensic science is also critically evaluated.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of examination strategies for the range of body fluids encountered in forensic biology casework together with the science underpinning the interpretation of bloodstain patterns. An awareness of the contribution of selected areas of the biological sciences to specialised forensic science studies is also given.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand the rationale for undertaking different body fluid examinations as an aid to crime investigation.
2. Relate the biological characteristics of different body fluids to the methods used for location and identification in the forensic laboratory.
3. Identify and interpret bloodstain patterns and relate these to a theoretical treatment of blood dynamics.
4. Have a basic understanding of how the results of biological examinations are used in the context of case interpretation.
5. Analyse and critically evaluate the contribution of selected areas of biology to specialised aspects of forensic science.

Indicative Content
1. Body Fluids
Methods for detection and confirmation of the presence of blood, saliva, semen, faeces and urine. Interpretation of the presence and distribution of such staining and an understanding of body fluid persistence.
2. Blood Dynamics and Blood Stain Patterns
Rheology of blood and blood behaviour. Impact, cast- off, arterial and transfer patterns, interpretation and evidential value.
3. Selected Areas of Biology Relevant to Forensic Science
For example: aspects of entomology, trichology and other specialist areas of forensic biology may be considered.

FOR303 Description

To further understand the theoretical basis for chromatography and to use spectroscopic techniques to identify organic compounds 

Aims
The aim of this module is to enable the student to understand and apply the theory and practicalities behind chromatographic techniques used in forensic science and to use spectroscopic techniques to identify unknown organic compounds. 

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe the theory of and techniques used to separate organic components 
2. Explain how separation techniques are used in forensic science 
3. Analyse spectroscopic data to obtain plausible structures for unknown organic compounds 
4. Carry out organic separations and analyses in the laboratory in a safe and efficient manner 

Indicative Content
1. Chromatography
Methods of separation; paper chromatography; column chromatography; chromatograms-integration, calibration, response factors; HPLC; GC; GC-MS; LC-MS.  Thermodynamic and kinetic principles of separation.
2. Spectroscopy
Near Infrared spectroscopy; Mid Infrared spectroscopy, Raman spectroscopy, 1H and 13C nuclear magnetic resonance; mass spectrometry; uv-vis spectroscopy. 
3. Problem Solving
Use of a range of spectroscopic data to provide rational structures for selected organic compounds. Forensic Science related case studies, such as the analysis and identification of fire accelerants or drugs of abuse. 
4. Laboratory Techniques
Carry out a range of separation and spectroscopic techniques in the laboratory on forensic related samples. 

FOR309 Description

Examines the investigation, evaluation and interpretation of evidence from firearms, fires and explosions. It examines causes of fire, thermodynamics of combustion, sample collection and packaging, chemical tests and analytical techniques for fire debris analysis. It explores the nature of explosives and explosions, blast wave propagation, damage caused and the forensic evidence. We will cover internal, external and terminal ballistics and evidence from firearms discharge, recovered bullets and cartridge casing, and consider crime scene to court presentation and interpretation. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital, Personal and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives.

Aims

The aims of this Module are to enable the student to: (i) examine and characterise the origin of fire/explosion debris; (ii) evaluate techniques for distinguishing residues, (iii) identify the source and subsequent history of samples, (iv) understand the principles of kinetics/dynamics, energetics, phase transfer, and (v) the interpretation and understanding of ballistics evidence.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Apply the principles of kinetics and thermodynamics to fires and explosions
2. Critically interpret findings of fire investigations in relation to fire dynamics
3. Characterise explosives, fire debris and firearms discharge residue
4. Evaluate forensic firearm and ballistic examinations
5. Conduct and critically interpret a range of relevant laboratory techniques.

Indicative Content
1. Fire and Explosion Dynamics: Heat transfer mechanisms, ignition and spread of flame, spontaneous and smouldering combustion, pre-and post-flash-over fires, smoke movement, buoyancy, fuel load.
2. Thermochemistry of Fuels and Explosives: Combustion and energy release, oxygen balance and the Kistiakowsky−Wilson rules, Hess's law, heat and temperature of explosion, the concept of heat capacity.
3. Explosion and Fire Debris analysis: Explosives classification, factors affecting detonation. Debris position, identification of mechanical, thermal history and origin. Use of chemical tests to identify potential explosive residues and accelerants. Fire cause diagnosis, identification of origin of fire and source of ignition.
4. Internal, External and Terminal Ballistics: Factors affecting velocity, trajectory and impact of ballistic weapons, wounding, permanent and temporary cavity production factors.
5. Ballistic physical evidence: Tool-marks, firing pin impressions, rifling striations, gunshot residue, class and individual characteristics, factors affecting evidence production, transfer and persistence and interpretation.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Game Design and Production course.

Choose three from the following modules:

DES201 Narrative Design

DES205 Level Design and Scripting

DES206 User Interfaces and User Experience

DES208 Business of Games

AUD201 Audio Design

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Game Design and Production course.

Module 1: DES303 Production & Leadership

For Module 2, choose one of the following 40 credit modules:

DES312 Gameplay and Systems Balancing (40 credits)

DES313 Player Experience Design (40 credits)

AUD313 Interactive Sound and Music Design (40 credits)

DES201 Description

The module will introduce students to the knowledge, processes and techniques necessary to formulate and explore effective, innovative game ideas with consideration for the structure of both gameplay and narrative design.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to engage with the development of innovative game concepts, through establishing an informed awareness of design process and evaluation.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe and practice the techniques and processes required to effectively form, develop, and design games.
2. Demonstrate a considered design process and awareness of the key conceptual, audience, and cultural models that can impact on game design.
3. Create game design documentation and artefacts that reflect the processes utilised across the mainstream games industry and emergent development communities.

Indicative Content
1. Game Genre Mechanics - Deconstructing core components of popular game genres.
2. Constructs of Gameplay - What is gameplay and how is this broken down and communicated within the game design.
3. Design Documents and Artefacts - Physical prototypes, visual documentation, technical design, capturing requirements.
4. Game Design Process - Conceptualisation, iteration, phases of workflow, alternative approaches.
5. Narrative Theory for Game Design - Themes, narrative structures, characters, storyboarding, animatics, scripts.
6. Experimental Approaches - Exploring emergent practices and methods for innovative game design.
7. Visualisation and Digital Techniques - Utilising digital techniques to produce gameplay and narrative previsualisation, developing rudimentary digital prototypes.
8. Audience and Cultural Engagement - Discussing the role of audience and exploring cultural aspects of game design.

DES205 Description

This module develops student skills in the use of game engines with an emphasis on the creation of game content and levels underpinned by level design theory and practice.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with the theoretical, practical, and technical knowledge required to utilise game engines and operate as an effective level designer.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Utilise core game engine functionality and tools for game development.
2. Develop custom logic and entities for use in game development.
3. Demonstrate an appreciation for level design theory through the development of game levels utilising a prominent game engine.

DES206 Description

Operating at the intersection of graphic visual communication design, interaction design, and user research, User Interface (UI) and User Experience (UX) designers hold significant responsibility within game development teams and digital design studios. This module provides an opportunity for students to develop their knowledge, understanding, and skills in UI/UX design, whilst also developing their applied knowledge and understanding of underpinning theories and methodologies.

Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular: Bullet list

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.
• Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.
• Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.
• Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the theoretical knowledge and practical skills necessary to develop effective user interfaces (UI) and user experiences (UX) underpinned by appreciation of visual communication design, interaction design and user research.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Display fundamental knowledge of visual communication design and their application on user interfaces.
2. Utilise relevant user experience research methods to produce desired design outcomes.
3. Justify and reflect on design decisions based on user experience research as well as existing literature on visual communication, user experience, interface and interaction design.

DES208 Description

The landscape of game markets and business models is evolving with the growth of new technologies, audiences, and opportunities. As a result, there are many innovations in game production pipelines – pitching and publishing, economics and revenue, and our understanding of player behaviours - that impact upon a game’s design. This module explores the intersection between game markets, releasing and publishing games, and their impact upon the game design process to equip students with the professional lens from which decisions and analysis shape the successes of game releases. Abertay Attributes, Personal, Active Citizen, Digital, Professional, Intellectual.

Aims
The aim of this module is to engage students in the practices and processes involved with releasing games to market, with appreciation of market context, platform requirements, game pitching and marketing, and publishing pipelines.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Develop an awareness of games markets and business models to underpin effective publishing proposals.
2. Evidence an ability to critically evaluate specific market information such as market gaps and opportunities, audiences, and platform performances.
3. Propose an appropriate market launch plan in response to a selected creative brief.

Indicative Content
1. Game Business Models - An overview of different business models for games including Premium, Free-to-Play, Games as a Service, and non-commercial models.
2. Game Pitches - Analysing game marketplaces to underpin practical techniques for pitching games to various audiences, including investors, creative directors, and player audiences.
3. The Free-to-Play Model - An overview and history of the free-to-play marketplace, spotlighting unique challenges to making live-service games on studios, development cycles and team roles.
4. Key Performance Indicators - Breaking down core KPIs and analytics used in the decision-making and evaluation processes of game design and development such as revenue, engagement and retention.
5. Ethical Design - Exploring the psychology, ethics and moral design decisions involved with game revenue models, including loot boxes, compulsion, and co-morbidities.
6. User Acquisition - Explaining user acquisition and strategies to growing audiences.
7. Marketing - Identifying the key components required for preparing a game for market and methods used to validate publishing, including focus testing and market research.
8. Trailers - Identifying what makes a good trailer and the importance of considering marketing materials early in development.
9. Marketplaces and Platforms - Understanding the release process for various platforms and navigating publishing for games.
10. Post-release Criticism - Practices and processes for analysing reviews, criticism, media management, and social media, with case studies of successes and failures in game launches.

AUD201 Description

This module introduces students to the theory and practice of sound and music for games. Drawing on examples from film and animation as well as games, the module will explore high quality audio production and interactive audio design tools that enable its implementation in a game environment.

Aims
This module aims to develop an understanding and working knowledge of the production techniques and workflows that underpin audio design and implementation for games.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Develop an applied understanding of the key theories, concepts, and practices pertinent to the design and production of audio for games
2. Define and produce an audio design document, taking into account audience, platform, and technical constraints
3. Demonstrate the creative and technical skills necessary to produce libraries of audio assets for implementation in a game

DES303 Description

This module develops an in-depth understanding of the issues around the production process and managing a creative team

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the role processes and methodologies associated with person- management skills required for the creative industries. Together with the legal and ethical frameworks surrounding creative media, and operating in a professional manner within these constraints.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Explain the issues relating to keeping a team of creative individuals content and productive
2. Analyse and evaluate techniques and practices to keep a team project on time and within budget
3. Know how to analyse and evaluate the risks associated with a development, and to classify and control these risks
4. Describe and discuss a range of current business models that underpin and drive media production and distribution.
5. Critically analyse a variety of legal, moral and ethical issues affecting the creative industries.

DES312 Description

In this module students will focus on the development of compelling gameplay systems. This will be done through development of both the technical and creative skills required to design game mechanics as well as a theoretical understanding of what constitutes a compelling numeric gameplay system. In implementing gameplay students will deploy rapid prototyping to plan and develop engaging game mechanics in modern game engines. Students will also consider wider systems design, incorporating the analysis of player data, to design engaging systems with considered rates of progression, resource acquisition and achievement for players.

Through engaging with this module, students will develop the Intellectual, Personal, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes, specifically:

• Intellectual: Students will consider what makes a game fun to play in a focused environment through the development of game mechanics and at a much broader level through wider system design. They will critically evaluate how well these aims were met by designers of other games. Through the analysis of data students will be supported in interpreting how games are played as whether games are engaging and the effects on retention and acquisition of redesign.
• Personal: Through collaborative work with peers, students will develop the core skills of communication, leadership, delegation, adaptability, and accountability. Through independent work students will develop the core skills of time-management, resilience, and critical thinking.
• Professional: This module will introduce students to industrial tools as well as the techniques used in modern game development. They will work in a professional setting designed to mirror industrial team-based system development.
• Digital: Students will use the software required in game development and be instructed in how to do so following best practice. They will use tools in a professional and sustainable way, including the use of version control and remote collaboration.
• Active Citizen: The group work in this module, focusing on subjective issues such as fairness, engagement, and enjoyment, will engender discussions that will require a level of empathy and understanding.

Aims
The aim of this module is for students to understand what tools are available to game designers to make games fair and engaging in both a broad and narrow scope, as well as how those tools can be used effectively.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate the ability to design and implement their own engaging gameplay prototypes.
2. Gather and interpret player data to analyse the balance of a game and suggest redesign.
3. Consider how games are played and design systems in a way that promotes diverse ways of playing and has no single dominant strategy.

DES313 Description

This module will provide students with a theoretical and practical understanding of the player experience and the ability to design for a specific type of player experience. Students will be supported to analyse and discuss ‘games as played’ and deconstruct games to identify how the various game components work together to support the desired player experience. Alongside discussion and game analysis, students will be supported to design and implement a prototype which focuses on their desired player experience.

Through engaging with this module, students will develop the Intellectual, Personal, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes.

Intellectual: students will be supported to master the subject of player experience and player-centric design, understand how the subject is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and multitude of perspectives on the play experience and recognise how this knowledge can be applied in their own design practice. They will be supported to evaluate information critically and rigorously, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.

Personal: students will undertake independent and group activities as part of this module which will support them to be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising. Discussing games from multiple perspectives will enable them to be responsive and responsible in personal, cultural and social contexts.

Professional: students will be supported to develop portfolios of professional development which will equip and motivate them to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers. They will be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.

Digital: this module focuses on digital game analysis and development and students will be supported to develop digital fluency, knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. This will prepare them for the world of work and allow them to understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts.

Be active citizens: the module will engage students with debate and critical analysis of games in context and support them to be inclusive, globally conscientious, and socially respectful, and self-reflective. We will maintain and continuously develop awareness of their civic, ethical and environmental responsibilities.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with an applied understanding of player experience design and the ability to critically discuss the play experience.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Formally analyse and deconstruct different types of games to understand how design shapes the player experience
2. Develop a prototype in which all formal elements work together to create a predefined player experience
3. Communicate the player experience goals and how these are addressed through the prototype

AUD313 Description

This module examines contemporary audio practices used in the context of interactive digital media and games. Throughout the semester, methods and implementation techniques for a wide a range of applications will be explored, such as games, audio enabled apps for mobile devices, new instruments for musical expression, web audio applications, sonic art and AR/VR audio.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the students with a concrete understanding of the basic principles behind dynamic audio system design, implementation and deployment in different contexts, as well as introduce basic concepts the physics of sound, synthesis techniques and algorithmic music. Methods for interface and user experience design, sonic interaction design, gestural analysis, as well as mapping strategies will be explored. These will form the basis for critical discussion, analysis and interpretation of existing work, towards the development of novel bespoke dynamic audio systems. Through the course of the semester, the students will develop familiarity with the fundamental principles for interactive sound and music design and implementation in order to interpret and address a

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse and contextualize audio-enabled applications technically and conceptually.
2. Conceptualise, design, and implement dynamic audio-enabled applications.
3. Solve technical and conceptual problems relating to sound and music and UI/UX design for interactive audio environments and games.
4. Have a solid understanding of physics-based audio principles and algorithmic and generative music structures.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the LLB Law course.

Module 1:LAW205 Family Law

Module 2: LAW206 Business Transactions

Module 3: LAW208 EU Law

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the LLB Law course.

Module 1: LAW305 Legal Philosophy and Human Rights

Modules 2&3: Choose two of the below options:

LAW303 Public International Law

LAW307 Employment Law

BMT311 Business and Environmental Sustainability: Reaching net-zero

SOC303 Race, Ethnicity and Immigration

LAW205 Description

An introduction to the legal principles governing family relationships and their breakdown, children and parenthood in Scotland.

Aims
The aim of this module is to examine the key legal principles governing family relationships and their breakdown, children and parenthood in Scotland.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Define and analyse the requirements for a valid marriage or civil partnership.
2. Explain and discuss the legal rights of spouses, civil partners and cohabitants to property brought into and acquired during the relationship.
3. Explain and discuss the legal rights, duties and obligations which arise as a result of the legal relationship between parents and their children.
4. Identify the grounds of divorce and dissolution and understand the statutory legal principles governing the division of property on relationship breakdown.
5. Demonstrate skills of comprehension and application of legal principles, negotiation and reflection.

Indicative Content
1. Parent and Child
Parental responsibilities and rights; adoption; local authority intervention; human rights of family members.
2. Marriage and Civil Partnership
Regular and irregular marriage; Same sex marriage; validity of civil and religious marriages; prohibitions and legal impediments to marriage; void and voidable marriages. Civil Partnerships and Gender Recognition.
3. Rights Arising out of Marriage and Civil Partnership
Aliment, separate property rights.
4. Family Homes and Family Protection
Occupancy rights of spouses, civil partners and cohabitants, exclusion orders.
5. Relationship Breakdown
Grounds in divorce & dissolution actions. Division of property on relationship breakdown including financial provision, property transfer orders and decrees regulating occupancy rights.

LAW206 Description

Communication|Problem Solving|Research|Planning|Professionalism

Aims
To identify and examine the principles of Scots commercial law, consumer law and finance as they relate to business and consumer transactions.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the principles and transactions of commercial law and consumer law in Scotland
2. Formulate structured written answers to defined commercial and consumer law issues
3. Provide written advice for hypothetical clients on consumer and/or commercial law problems
4. Demonstrate a clear understanding of the way in which commercial and consumer law operate to promote good business practice

Indicative Content
1. Sale and supply of goods and services to businesses
Contract of sale and related contracts to businesses: implied terms, transfer of property and risk, breach and remedies, operation of the Sale of Goods Act 1979, Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982 and the Unfair Contract Terms Act 1977
2. Sale and supply of goods and services to consumers:
Consumer Rights Act 2015, Consumer Protection Act 1987, Consumer contracts regulations
3. Rights in Security
Rights in security over moveables, lien, pledge, hypothec, standard securities, floating charges, guarantees and cautionary obligations.
4. Debt recovery and personal insolvency
Diligence: attachment inhibition, arrestment, adjudication and money attachment. Personal insolvency and the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016.
5. Insurance
The common law of insurance: operation of the Third Parties (Rights against Insurers) Act 2010, the Consumer Insurance (Disclosures and Representations) Act 2010, the Insurance Act 2015
6. Consumer credit and consumer finance
Consumer Credit Act 1974, hire purchase, loans, banking practice, mortgages, personal savings and investments, pensions, stocks and shares, basic rules of taxation and money laundering
7. Arbitration and ADR
ADR forms such as negotiation, mediation and arbitration. Arbitration in Scotland: Arbitration (Scotland) Act 2010

LAW208 Description

This module examines the constitutional and legal framework of the European Union and its key institutions, the law relating to the single market within the EU and the principles of free movement and EU citizenship, as well as considering the constitutional implications and procedures of Brexit.

Through engaging with this module, you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Understand how legal knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be able to work independently.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practice, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving you knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions (online learning).
• Maintain and continuously develop awareness of your legal responsibilities

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with knowledge and understanding of the constitutional and administrative framework of the EU, the principles of the EU legal system, and aspects of substantive EU law.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. analyse, examine and discuss the role and rationale of the EU institutions
2. analyse and discuss the relationship between national and EU law
3. analyse, examine and discuss the key features of the EU legal system: supremacy, direct effects, general principles, references, infringement proceedings, judicial review, and state liability
4. analyse and apply the principles of EU free movement
5. identify, state and apply legal principles and demonstrate skills of oral and written communication and legal reasoning.
6. Analyse and examine the key issues arising from Brexit and the EU- EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement.

Indicative Content
1. Brexit: The EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement, “retained” EU law, extraterritorial effect of EU law.
2. Institutions: Principal institutions of the EU, including European Commission, European Council, Council of the European Union, Court of Justice of the EU, Parliament, ECB, Court of Auditors; other important bodies such as the Economic and Social Committee and the Committee of the Regions.
3. Judicial Role: References, review, principles of supremacy, direct and indirect effects, state liability, general principles. The procedures of the Court of Justice
4. Law of the EU internal market: Free movement of Goods, Services, Persons and Capital; Right of Establishment in another EU Member State.

LAW305 Description

Brief Description

An examination of the theories and concepts which underpin law, with further detailed consideration of Human Rights Law.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to develop the student's understanding of the theories and concepts which underpin law and the application of Human Rights Law.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the development of the Western legal tradition and fundamental legal concepts.
2. Critically evaluate different schools of thought within the Western Legal Tradition
3. Understand and critically apply the principles of Human Rights law
4. Demonstrate higher-level legal writing skills and apply legal skills and knowledge in a practical and theoretical context
5. Demonstrate higher-level legal skills and knowledge in a practical and theoretical context through debating contested and conflicting philosophical views

Indicative Content
1. Fundamental Legal Concepts

Law, the State and the individual; law and other disciplines; rule of law; concepts of rights and justice.

2. Development of the Western Legal Tradition

Global legal systems; the Western Legal Tradition; natural law theories; the Utilitarians; Kant; Marx

3. Legal Theories of the 20th Century

Legal theories of the 20th century: American realism; legal positivism; liberalism; legal sociology; critical legal theory, feminism and race; post-modernism

4. Human Rights

UN Human Rights instruments; The European Convention on Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms; The Scotland Act 1998; The Human Rights Act 1998; the impact of human rights law in Scotland and the UK

LAW303 Description

Public International Law is the body of rules and principles which are binding upon states (and certain other entities) in their relations with one another. Public International Law is sometimes called the "law of nations" or just simply International Law.

Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular you will:

• Master the subject, understand how it is evolving and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Understand how legal knowledge is generated, processed, and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers, tackling complex issues using considered judgements.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, developing the knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions (learning online)
• Maintain and continuously develop awareness of your legal responsibilities.

Aims

Public International Law is aimed at providing students with knowledge and understanding of the principles of public international law. The module introduces students to debates about the nature of international law and the international legal order, and its relationship to states, conflict, justice and human rights.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. discuss the functioning of the international legal system, international law-making processes, differing approaches to the subject, and display a greater familiarity with international law research materials and methods;
2. describe and evaluate contemporary legal issues in public international law and identify lacunae in the law in the context of the relationship between states and certain other entities;
3. appraise and evaluate the rules underpinning the law as it relates to states’ interaction with one another and with international organisations in the context of the above-mentioned relationship; and
4. form legally-accountable opinions on a number of cutting-edge issues in the field of public international law.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction: Public international law as a discipline in the context of the relationship between states and other entities. The underpinnings of public international law as a discipline distinct from municipal (national) law and private international law.
2. Substantive Issues: Issues that are included are the historical development and theory of international law; the relationship between municipal law and international law; sources of public international law; states as subjects of international law; territory; the use of force in international law; state responsibility; self-contained legal regimes; the settlement of international disputes.

LAW307 Description

This module examines the individual contract of employment at common law and under statute and the regulation which applies to that contract

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with ability to critically analyse and evaluate the law and policy relating to the employment relationship.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse and apply the principles of employment law.
2. Analyse and apply the principles of contract and delict to the employment relationship
3. Analyse and discuss critically the impact of EU Law, and Brexit, on the contract of employment
4. Demonstrate higher level legal oral and writing skills and apply legal skills and knowledge in a practical and/or theoretical context while reflecting thereon.

Indicative Content
1. Formation of the Contract of Employment
Definition; form; jurisdiction and choice of law, continuous employment; fixed-term, retiring age.
2. Administration of Employment Law
The Tribunals system; the Department for Business Innovation and Skills and other agencies active in this field e.g. ACAS, Equality and Human Rights Commission.
3. Terms of the Contract
Minimum statutory requirements; express, implied, custom, collective agreements. Terms imposed by the common law and modified by statute. Employment protection provided by statute: e.g. suspension from work; family friendly working rights; pay; insolvency of employer; National Minimum Wage; working hours.
4. Discrimination in Employment
General; Equality Act 2010 and protected characteristics of gender reassignment, race, disability, age, religion or belief, sex, sexual orientation, pregnancy and maternity, and marriage and civil partnership; equal pay
5. Discipline and Grievance
Works' rules and procedures; ACAS recommended practice.
6. Transfer of a Business
UK implementation of EU Directives; rights of transferred employees.
7. Termination of the Contract of Employment
Notice; dismissal: wrongful, unfair; redundancy; remedies.

BMT311 Description

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with :

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand current societal and political factors driving organisations to reduce environmental impact;
2. Evaluate an organisations current environmental impact;
3. Create and implement a new strategy to reduce an organisations environmental impact

Indicative Content
1. Environmental stewardship: Examine why environmental stewardship is important for any business to pursue, and why that importance will likely grow stronger in the future
2. Evaluating impact: Methods for evaluating an organisations current environmental impact
3. Implementing your vision: Defining initiatives that fill gaps between the current state and the future vision and constructing a roadmap for achieving the vision
4. Managing change: To introduce and explain business process transformation methodologies, with supporting technology and tools, that focus on increasing operational efficiency and reducing waste. E.g. IBM’s Green Sigma methodology
5. Frameworks for going green: Frameworks for developing and implementing a green strategy, and illustrate the benefits many organisations have realised in each strategic area

SOC303 Description

This module will examine the history of race and racism in 19th, 20th and 21st century Britain, from the 'Scramble for Africa' through the postwar/post-colonial period to the present. It will examine the various forces, processes and discourses through which race, ethnicity and the racialised subject have been constructed, shaped and changed. It will also examine theoretical approaches to and debates about race and ethnicity, racism, race relations and anti-racism, and how these have developed in response to both historical developments and social-political activism.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide students with: a critically informed understanding of the history of race and racism in Britain; theories of race, ethnicity, racism and prejudice; and the relationship between theories and concepts of race and ethnicity, power, history and activism.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand and critically engage with the history of race, racism and immigration in 20th century Britain.
2. Understand and critically engage with the history and development of the concepts of race and ethnicity.
3. Understand and critically engage with the relationship between the theorisation and conceptualisation of race and ethnicity, racism and antiracism, power, history and activism.
4. Have knowledge of and critically engage with the diverse sociological (and wider) theories of race, ethnicity, racism and prejudice.
5. Understand and critically engage with theories and concepts of race, racism, ethnicity, colonialism, imperialism, nationalism, power, inequality, prejudice, difference, representation & identity.
6. Work in both an individual and group setting, and develop critical, collaborative, written and oral presentation skills.

Indicative Content
1. The Concept and Construction of Race and Ethnicity: This section will look at the concept and construction of race and ethnicity, and the production of racial knowledge from the colonial period to the present.
2. Race, Ethnicity and Nation: This section will examine the (re)construction and relationship between race, ethnicity and nation in Britain in light of postwar/ post-colonial immigration and the end of empire.
3. Race, Ethnicity and Identity: This section will examine the the politics, construction and expression of racial and ethnic identities in post-colonial Britain in response to colonialism, migration, discrimination and racism.
4. Race and Class: This section will examine the relationship between race and class as sites of social-political identification, power, inequality, political struggle and analysis, as well as debates over which is the most effective framework for analysis and activism.
5. Race and Gender: This section will examine the relationship between race and gender as sites of social-political identification, power, inequality, political struggle and analysis, as well as debates over which is the most effective framework for analysis and activism.
6. Race, Crime, Civil Unrest and Political Protest: This section will examine the relationship (within analysis and representation) between race, the law, crime, civil unrest and political protest against socioeconomic conditions, policing and state policy.
7. Anti-Racism, Race Relations and Multiculturalism: This section will examine the history and development of anti-racist and race relations discourses, activism, strategies and legislation, how they have attempted to combat forms of racism, discrimination and inequality, and debates surrounding them.
8. Race, Ethnicity and the Politics of Popular Culture: This section will examine popular culture (e.g. music, film or television) in terms of postcolonial cultural politics, multiculturalism, representation, identity and political activism.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Marketing and Business course.

Module 1: BMT214 Business Analytics

Module 2:BMT213 Theory and Practice in HRM

Module 3: BMT216 People, Planet, Profit

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Marketing and Business course.

Module 1: BMT302 Digital Business Strategy

Module 2: BMT319 Market Intelligence and Consumer Behaviour

Module 3: choose one of the following

BMT315 Customer Relationship Management

BMT311 Business and Environmental Sustainability: Reaching net-zero

BMT323 Employability Analysis &Professionalism

BMT214 Description

Business Analytics is generally thought to comprise three broad categories: descriptive analytics, predictive analytics, and prescriptive analytics. This module focuses on the first two and it has been designed for students that have taken an introductory statistics module as well as for students with no prior higher education experience in statistics.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with the theory and techniques to perform business analysis using descriptive and predictive analytics.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify data requirements and source required data;
2. Make sense of and analyse data using statistical methods and statistical software;
3. Interpret analysis results, gain insights into the interrelationships of different business aspects and their effect on organisational decision making, and use results/insights to inform decisions.

Indicative Content
1. Control and quality of decisions:
Are we in control of our decisions; is decision making rational or emotional; what makes for a good decision; is decision making an art or a science – data and information, characteristics of good information; applications of big data and analytics; use of data in the finance function and creating value for organisations
2. Overview of business decision-making methods
including multi-criteria decision analysis; conjoint analysis, pareto analysis, SWOT analysis, etc.
3. Decision tables and decision trees;
Demonstrate the relationship between data variables
4. Basic business data analysis using Excel.
The use of digital technologies in the finance function; demonstrate trends and patterns using an appropriate technique; prepare a trend equation using either graphical means or regression analysis; identify the limitations of forecasting models
5. Business decision-making in practice
using a Business Simulation.

BMT213 Description

This module builds on students’ existing knowledge of human resource management and develops their understanding of HRM theory and practice.

Aims
The aim of this module is to develop students’ critical appraisal of the role of human resource management within contemporary organisations.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of key HRM concepts and practices;
2. Explain and evaluate the purpose and operation of HRM in contemporary organisations;
3. Demonstrate awareness of HRM-related social, cultural and environmental responsibilities in a global context.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to HRM
Theoretical perspectives to HRM; practical approaches to HRM
2. Context and HRM
National, international, occupational, organisational and individual contexts of HRM in theory and in practice
3. Strategic HRM
Introduction to strategic human resource management; ‘best fit’ and ‘best practice’ approaches
4. HRM, work and wellbeing
Fair work; dignity at work; mental health and stress at work; the benefits and challenges of flexibility
5. HRM, equality and diversity
Inequalities in the labour market and in the workplace; managing diverse workforce
6. Managing conflict in the workplace
Conflict in the employment relationship; misbehaviour, discipline and grievance procedures; bullying and harassment; disputes
7. Contemporary HRM trends and future challenges
Continuity and change in work and employment; gig economy; (ir)responsible HRM

BMT216 Description

This module develops an awareness in students in the critical success factors of sustainable business.

Aims
The module aims to develop student awareness of the business challenges associated with sustainable business creation and development and to provide students with the knowledge and skills required to make a convincing case for investment in a sustainable business idea.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify the key business challenges associated with the creation of sustainable business.
2. Prepare and produce a sustainable business investment pitch
3. Understand the issues involved in ethical practices in emergent business
4. Identify and promote new sustainable business opportunities

Indicative Content
1. People: Beautifying Business − Opportunity or gimmick.
Managing the triple bottom line; Business boundaries, doing more with less; strategies for sustainable business development; Business and the planet; Sustainable entrepreneurship and new business models, Corporate social responsibility
2. Profit: Ethical investing and responsible investment
Responsible investment and the cost to society and the individual.
3. Planet: Environment, enterprise and innovation
Wealth from Waste… Students will be encouraged to consider opportunities for innovation which identify revenue streams arising from re−use of waste materials
4. Energy Enterprise
Ideas and innovation which maximise current energy sources or innovate in the realm of renewable energy production/storage/delivery; Planet Premium and Ecosystem Services… acknowledging and valuing benefits and services delivered by the natural environment. Payment for ecosystem services, willingness to pay.

BMT302 Description

Exploiting technology to transform service delivery through Internet portals, intra-corporate connected environments, social networks etc. and transforming internal processes and ways of working with partners are strategic issues considered by most organisations, both large and small. This module is about how companies can improve their competitiveness by using digital solutions.

Aims
The aim of this module is to build student capacity in understanding the role of digital solutions in creating effective business practice that enhances a company’s competitive advantage.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Assess the impact of digital technology on business competitiveness;
2. Critically evaluate a range of issues relating to customers and companies engaging in digital processes;
3. Assess the options associated with development of a digital solution for improving business competitiveness, formulate own proposals for digital strategy and create implementation framework.

Indicative Content
1. Meaning and scope of e-business and e-commerce
Introduction and overview: current trends and issues. The evolution of e-business.
2. Analysis of firm's external environment
The macro-environment and implications for e-business ventures. Defining industry, segments and target markets for e-business.
3. Analysis of firm's internal environment
The meaning of core competence in e-business; the four virtual spaces of the ICDT framework for interaction with customers; the meaning of the company¿s value chain and value network.
4. Digital business strategy: Approaches
The elements of strategy design for digital business; application of generic strategies to e-business.
5. e-Business and the supply chain
The elements of supply chain management and their relationship to the value chain and value networks; strategic partnering.
6. Foundations of value creation in e-business
Understanding of what the value is and elements that contribute to value creation; the value grid and levers of e-value creation.
7. Dealing with disruptive innovations in e-business
Successful imitation and the barriers to imitation; how companies can assess the threat of a disruptive innovation; the ways to deal with a disruptive innovation in e- business.
8. Strategy for the internal organisation of e-business
Reasons that determine `make-or-buy’ decisions in e- business; the organisational structures for e-business activities; the concept of value chain deconstruction and the role of the Internet for unbundling the corporation.
9. Choosing an e-business strategy for interacting with user
The trade-off between richness and reach in e-business; customer relationship management in the digital context; the concept of mass-customisation.

BMT319 Description

The module focuses on providing critical insights into consumer behaviour and the importance of understanding consumers in contemporary organisations. It also provides insights into the market research methods and analytical tools that can be used to achieve this understanding. The module explores key consumer behaviour theory and concepts, along with fundamental principles of market research and data analysis to support data-driven decision making in organisations.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : an understanding of consumer behaviour concepts and the link between consumer behaviour and market research; an understanding of the principles of marketing research and data analysis; the ability to develop appropriate research designs and effectively analyse data to support data-driven marketing decisions.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically evaluate consumer behaviour concepts and their role and practical implications in contemporary marketing practice
2. Evaluate, justify and select an appropriate research design to examine consumer behaviour tendencies
3. Analyse and interpret data in a marketing context

Indicative Content
1. Fundamentals of consumer behaviour
Decision-making models and influences on decision-making; Needs, motivation and values; Perception, memory and learning; Attitude theory; Theories on personality, self and identity; Social and group influences on consumer behaviour; Digital consumer behaviour.
2. Principles of marketing research
Designing marketing research projects and identifying researchable questions; The importance of data and data-driven decisions in marketing; Primary research methods in marketing: quantitative and qualitative data collection techniques; Secondary research in marketing; Data quality.
3. Data analysis
Using SPSS to analyse, interpret and draw conclusions from quantitative data; Qualitative data analysis.

BMT315 Description

This module provides students with the understanding of the role of relationship building and customer experience management to business performance.

Aims
The aim of this module is to give students an in-depth understanding of the various facets of relationship building and customer experience management. The module aims to provide students with the skills to develop appropriate strategies for managing customer relationships.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically evaluate the significance of relationship management and customer experience management to business performance.
2. Develop creative solutions for a relevant relationship building and customer experience management problem.

Indicative Content
1. Defining the nature of customer relationship management
The use of data and insights to drive the strategic, operational and analytical aspects of relationship management. Aligning customer relationships with organisational visions and objectives.
2. Understanding customer relationships
Understanding the benefit of relationships to customers and to organisations. The use of technology to evaluate the customer lifecycle, develop customer loyalty and enhance the value of the customer relationship.
3. Customer portfolio management
The process of using data and insight to support segmenting, targeting and profiling customers andw to analyse the value of the various segments and provide them with tailored, relevant acquisition or retention strategies.
4. Customer experience management
Using various digital tools to support the delivery of customer-experienced value. Exploring how value of a customer experience is determined and by whom. The difference between customer experience management and customer relationship management.

BMT311 Description

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with :

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand current societal and political factors driving organisations to reduce environmental impact;
2. Evaluate an organisations current environmental impact;
3. Create and implement a new strategy to reduce an organisations environmental impact

Indicative Content
1. Environmental stewardship: Examine why environmental stewardship is important for any business to pursue, and why that importance will likely grow stronger in the future
2. Evaluating impact: Methods for evaluating an organisations current environmental impact
3. Implementing your vision: Defining initiatives that fill gaps between the current state and the future vision and constructing a roadmap for achieving the vision
4. Managing change: To introduce and explain business process transformation methodologies, with supporting technology and tools, that focus on increasing operational efficiency and reducing waste. E.g. IBM’s Green Sigma methodology
5. Frameworks for going green: Frameworks for developing and implementing a green strategy, and illustrate the benefits many organisations have realised in each strategic area

BMT323 Description

The module affords students the opportunity to investigate how to make use of the established graduate employability frameworks and align their own skills, knowledge and experience with the requirements of prospective employers. They will then test out their professional skills on a live management project, set by a client.

Aims

The aim of this module is to help students prepare for graduate recruitment by investigating the modern graduate employability frameworks, assessing own skills, attributes and behaviours, and practicing these in a live management challenge. The aim of this module is to help students prepare for graduate recruitment by investigating the modern graduate employability frameworks, assessing own skills, attributes and behaviours, and practicing these in a live management challenge.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the current state of employment market in the field they wish to work, changing job requirements and identify the graduate employability elements required for the career in the chosen sector.
2. Assess personal employability, identify gaps and ways to address them.
3. Identify, investigate and make recommendations on a business or management problem demonstrating professional skills.
4. Reflect on project experience and develop learning points for the future.

Indicative Content
1. Understanding theoretical frameworks of graduate employability:Understanding the nature and purpose of modern concepts and frameworks of graduate employability.
2. Understanding employers’ needs: Understanding the trends in the chosen field of employment, employers’ requirements for staff, and how these requirements evolve.
3. Assessment of personal employability: Investigation of the range of employers’ requirements for workers in the student’s chosen field. Assessment of personal employability to determine areas for development.
4. Investigation: Creating a timeline for the project. Interacting with stakeholders in a professional manner. Research the negotiated business/management challenge, making effective use of current academic and professional literature. Consider data requirements to evidence your solution. Creating short to long term recommendations.
5. Professionalism in client management: Acting in a professional manner e.g. being diplomatic, utilising negotiation skills, understanding the needs of the company may be different from idealised situations described in literature.
6. Project debriefing: Present findings and solutions to your client.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Psychology course.

Module 1: PSY208 Cognitive Perspectives on Psychology

For modules 2 & 3, choose TWO from the following:

PSY203 Forensic Psychology: Understanding Offending Behaviour

SPS201 Psychology for Sport and Exercise

PSY215 Tomorrow’s Child

FOR205 Forensic Human Identification

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Psychology course.

Module 1: PSY301 Human Variability: Psychobiology and Behaviour

Module 2: PSY314 Social Cognition across the Lifespan

Module 3: choose one from the following:

PSY304 Psychology and Technology: Advanced Methods

PSY315 Evidence-based thinking: Advanced perspectives on Human Behaviour

PSY313 Eyewitness Psychology: Applying memory research from crime scene to court

PSY208 Description

This module will introduce the cognitive and social aspects of the BPS core curriculum. Cognitive psychology encompasses much of what are considered ‘mental processes’. These processes range from relatively low-level processes of perception to higher level things like memory and decision making. The module will combine conventional lectures on cognitive psychology, supported by practical classes exposing students to experiments as participants.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : a critical and comprehensive understanding of the major topics, empirical research and theoretical approaches in cognitive psychology. The student will learn about how cognitive psychology works as a science, and will participate in experiments to deepen their understanding.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand conceptual and historical issues in cognitive psychology, the origins and philosophical underpinnings
2. Convey the major features of cognitive psychological processes.
3. Understand the key models and research findings in cognition psychology.
4. Evaluate psychological research findings.
5. Describe an experimental paradigm, using a conventional laboratory report structure.

Indicative Content
1. Conceptual and historical perspectives in cognition
Origins of research in cognition, and cognitive neuropsychology. Understanding how cognitive processes operate in different brain areas.
2. Neural architectures
Neurones, receptive fields and vision. How does the brain connect the world outside with our thoughts and experiences?
3. Perception and recognition
The recognition of objects and faces.
4. Attention
Is cognition a limited resource to be allocated carefully or do we attend to everything?
5. Learning and memory
What circumstances determine how we learn new information? How is this information stored in our brains and how do we access this information while reasoning?
6. Decision making and problem solving
How do we choose responses; how do we solve problems?

PSY203 Description

Forensic psychology is a constantly growing discipline and covers an exciting and broad range of topics. This module will examine key issues in forensic psychology integrating information from clinical, biological, developmental, personality, social and cognitive psychology.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with a comprehensive overview of Forensic Psychology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe and evaluate key developmental and genetic models of criminal psychopathology.
2. Assess the impact of environmental, family, cultural and peer influences on criminal behaviour.
3. Demonstrate an understanding of factors that increase the likelihood of serious and violent behaviour.
4. Demonstrate an awareness of risk prediction and the basis for interventions with offenders.
5. Understand methodological challenges associated with forensic psychology research.

Indicative Content
1. General Issues
Introduction to offenders, offences, victims, and the role of psychology in the actions of the police, the courts and prisons.
2. Explanatory Models of Crime and Offending
Biological factors, gender differences, individual differences, childhood and developmental issues, social and economic factors, and cognitive-behavioural approaches.
3. Developmental Basis for Criminal Behaviour
Biological basis of social, aggressive, and sexual behaviour with regard to neuropsychological, neuropharmacological and evolutionary issues. Psychological and biological treatments for childhood and adult psychopathology.
4. Mental Health and Offending
Mental health issues in offending behaviour. The relationship between mental health symptoms and risk in relation to offending. Personality disorder and schizophrenia as critical issues in serious offending.
5. Personality Abnormality
Inherited and acquired conditions in lifelong risk of criminal behaviour such as ADHD, Conduct Disorder (CD) and Oppositional Defiant Disorder (ODD). Examining the factors that increase the likelihood of serious sexual and violent behaviour, stalking, and criminal recidivism.
6. Substance Use and Crime
Addiction Models of criminal behaviour. Models of emotional dyscontrol in offending. The role of alcohol and drugs in serious assaultative behaviour, neuropharmcology and psychology.
7. Specific Criminal Offences
Consideration of information from specific offending populations and the psychological factors contributing to offences. Offences may include violent offending, fire raising, stalking, terrorism.
8. Sexual Offending
Detailed consideration of individual offenders and the psychological characteristics of their criminal offences and offence development in relation to sexual and violent offending.
9. Risk Assessment
Critical discussion of the role and nature of risk assessments with forensic populations including specific methods of risk assessment.
10. Treatment and Interventions
Consideration of the background to the development and application of treatments and interventions including `what works?' approaches and cognitive-behavioural treatments, as well as key issues relating to working with offenders.

SPS201 Description

The overall purpose of this module is to develop students’ understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology and how these apply to real world environments. This will be achieved by explicitly addressing students’ knowledge of affect, behaviour and cognition within relevant contexts. Students will examine intrapersonal and interpersonal factors and explore how these factors both shape and are shaped by involvement in sport and exercise. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• master their subject, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• understand how knowledge is generated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, and innovative.
• be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.
• be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of core psychological processes related to sport and exercise.
2. Explain psychological concepts that underpin performance at the individual level.
3. Explain psychological concepts that underpin team processes.
4. Review, interpret and present data collected from appropriate psychological tests.

Indicative Content
1. Definition of the field of sport and exercise psychology
2. Fundamentals of sport and exercise psychology
3. The role of personality in sport; models of achievement motivation and competitiveness; motivational climates; stress, arousal, anxiety and other emotional processes.
4. Group processes: Group and team dynamics, group cohesion, communication, leadership.
5. An introduction to psychological skills

PSY215 Description

The module will encourage students to anticipate the future opportunities and challenges that will face children in the next twenty years. By looking at emerging social norms and technologies this module will explore how children of the near future may learn, socialise, and thrive, as well as looking at what practical and mental health challenges may be faced. The module will focus on gathering appropriate evidence that can inform developmental psychology and professional practice when working directly with the next generation of children.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : an in-depth and critical understanding of important aspects of child development and developmental psychology in the mid-21st century. The module will equip students with an understanding of how best to support the next generations of children within our society. The module will challenge students to think about their current and/or future professional practice with children of varying ages.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of contemporary factors that affect children and their development.
2. Show knowledge of emerging patterns of recent changes in children's development.
3. Engage with appropriate research and evidence relating to changes in child development.
4. Engage in effective, knowledgeable communication regarding child development to stakeholders (academics, professionals, and children).
5. Demonstrate an understanding of real-world applications of this area.

Indicative Content
1. Childhood over the last century: An overview of how "childhood" has changed over the last 100 years. changing patterns of developmental research.
2. Relationships: Exploring generational changes in who children spend time with. Parenting, childcare and social networks.
3. Teaching and learning: Changes in curriculums and approaches to learning. Future directions of schools.
4. The use and misuse of technology: Technology in learning, learning of technology (e.g., cybersecurity), technology beyond learning
5. Developmental disorders and mental health: Definitions and prevalence as well as treatment, interventions and educational support.
6. Applications: Examining how we can apply this knowledge to professional practice with children.

FOR205 Description

This module will focus on the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process and introduce students to the use of biometric information, not just for personal security, but also in a forensic capacity for the purposes of human identification.

Aims

The aims of this module are to provide students with knowledge and understanding of biometric information, how it can be used in a forensic capacity for human identification, and to develop an understanding of the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Discuss the use of biometric data and its role in human identification, particularly in the context of criminal investigation and mass fatality incidents.
2. Demonstrate a sound knowledge and awareness of the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process.
3. Discuss the process of post mortem (PM) examinations and their value in forensic investigations.
4. Recognise the importance of a systematic approach to the identification of disaster victims.
5. Select appropriate documentation for forensic productions related to DVI.

Indicative Content
1. Biometric Human Identifiers: Application of biometric information for both personal security and human identification purposes. Biometric evidence recovery from a crime scene and/or victim. Specialised and emerging biometric data. Links to current biometric databases
2. INTERPOL DVI: Introduction to the INTERPOL Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process, recognising the four stages, the classification of disasters and understanding the identification criteria required to enable reconciliation.
3. Body Recovery and Mortuary Procedures: Describe and acknowledge the roles and responsibilities of the post mortem (PM) examination team. Recognise the sequence of a PM examination, the purpose and evidential value of samples recovered and how these items of evidence are preserved through integrity and continuity.

PSY301 Description

This module covers core BPS curriculum and examines the links between biology and psychology. It will introduce students to the physiology that underpins observable behaviour (genetics, CNS and the endocrine system), looking at processes that exert direct control over behavioural responses and those that play a modulatory role in human psychology. The module will also provide a framework of major topics examining current research in personality and individual differences based on its historical roots and questions in prevailing applied settings.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide knowledge of how biology affects behaviour and to introduce the evolutionary mechanisms that shape our minds. It will also investigate how biology, experience and personality produce individuality in humans.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Provide explanations of how biological and evolutionary processes influence specific cognitive and behavioural responses.
2. Critically evaluate theories and evidence that propose biological and psychological mechanisms seen in modern humans are a product of their evolutionary history.
3. Critically discuss how personality differences can be conceptualised, studied, and integrated in real life based on the main concepts and theoretical positions in current personality psychology.
4. Critically reflect upon differences between individuals during interactions and how they could be managed to achieve successful political, societal, work and environmental interventions.
5. Incorporate information gained through self-study into own knowledge- base to scaffold learning, both within biological psychology and individual differences and across psychological disciplines.

Indicative Content
1. Biological control of behaviour
How the central nervous and endocrine systems interact to produce observable behaviours such as movement, ingestion, and reproduction.
2. Psychopharmacology
Looking at the physiological consequences of taking recreational and therapeutic drugs, and biological and psychological underpinnings of drug addiction.
3. Hormones, reproduction and emotion
Examining how hormones influence mate choice, mating behaviour and sexual orientation; the biological underpinnings of emotion, emotional valence and components of the emotional response.
4. Behavioural genetics, evolutionary and sociobiology
Influences of genetics and environment on human behaviour; an introduction to the evolutionary processes that impact human and non-human animal cognition and social interactions.
5. Methodologies
Neuropsychology and neuroimaging: Looking at the physiological and behavioural effects of brain degeneration and implications for everyday life; introducing methods used in investigation of neural correlates of cognition. Psychological testing and application: Psychometric testing, specific aspects in personality tests, reliability, validity, BPS guidance.
6. Introduction to personality and individual differences
Introduction into main theories in personality and individual differences; Trait vs. State; Personality vs. Situation.
7. Intelligence
Definitions of intelligence; psychometric approaches to intelligence and their implications for educational and social policy; cognitive basis of intelligence. Debates about generational, racial, and gender differences in IQ.
8. Biological Influences
Heritability in intelligence and personality, neurobiological theories of personality, evolutionary influences & comparative personality, mental illness and personality disorders.
9. Personality and culture
Further ideas and debates in personality and culture including national character, social attitudes, evolutionary approaches, cognitive and learning styles, individual differences in health and illness, social anxiety and shyness.
10. Individual differences in cognitive styles
Individual differences in how we think, perceive and remember information. Exploration of different learning style and theories of learning.

PSY304 Description

The module involves learning the techniques required to design systematic approaches to scientific enquiry of the mind using the latest techniques and technologies. This includes identifying testable hypotheses and tractable questions. It also involves appreciating the technical constraints on display technology and the methodological considerations required to present stimuli accurately, precisely. Finally, it emphasises the importance of attaining the ability to communicate scientific methods for the benefit of others.

Aims
The aim of this module is to take a problem-based learning approach to the appreciation of the techniques required to conduct research in contemporary Psychological Science. The goal is to equip students with the ability to make informed judgments about appropriate methods and to select or implement the correct technique based on the requirements of the research question.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses in different methodological approaches to data collection and analysis in Psychological Science.
2. Select or implement an effective and appropriate technical or analytical solution suitable for addressing an empirical question in Psychological Science.
3. Use appropriate presentation format(s) to enable other investigators to replicate or appreciate the techniques used to solve an experimental problem or challenge.

Indicative Content
1. Technology in Psychology
Appreciating the opportunities of using computers to assess human performance to precisely control displays or to enable large volumes of data to be collected.
2. Control of computer displays
Strength and weaknesses of CRT Monitors, Flat panel displays, tablet computers, Virtual Reality etc. Using computers to run experiments on visual processing.
3. Sources of Error and Artifacts in Experiments
Showing how a knowledge and appreciation of technological limits of equipment can eliminate or reduce experimental artifacts.
4. Automation of data collection methods
Creating or modifying software to control the sequence, timing and data collection of experiments on analog or digital visual displays.
5. Visual Cognition and Vision Science
Measuring the limits of human visual performance. Using adjustment, staircase or constant stimuli methods. Understanding thresholds and bias. Explaining different methodological approaches to the assessment of eye-movements in scene perception and natural vision.
6. Data challenges In Psychology
Many areas of psychology create exceptionally large data sets, either through imaging techniques such as brain imagery, or distributed computing techniques such as mobile devices and social media. Each of these present opportunities for Psychological Science, but also challenges.
7. From Items Analysis to Linear Mixed Models
The inclusion of F1 and F1 Clark and Clark, Raijmaakers in the need for items analyses. Leading to the contemporary use of Linear Mixed Models. Using SPSS and R to calculate these.
8. Historical and Conceptual Issues
Using case studies to illustrate how technology has informed the creation of theoretical models of human processing. Understanding how technological evolution has driven developments in novel paradigms in vision science and visual cognition.

PSY314 Description

The module explores the processes that underpin social cognition across development and examines how these processes change from early childhood to adolescence, adulthood and older age. It provides an in-depth understanding of how we process and remember information in a social context, covering issues such as group processes, stereotyping and prejudice, and perception of self and others.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with an in-depth and critical understanding of issues related to social cognition across the lifespan, including key theoretical approaches and research findings, and real-world applications.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of social cognitive processes in psychology.
2. Show knowledge of the lifespan development of social cognition.
3. Engage in effective, knowledgeable communication regarding socio-cognitive research
4. Critically evaluate research relating to social cognition across the lifespan.
5. Demonstrate an understanding of real-world applications of social cognition research.

Indicative Content
1. Historical and Conceptual Issues: Introduction to research on the socio-cognitive approach, and the study of developmental changes in cognition and social processing.
2. Social Cognition: Stereotype formation and application: Models of stereotyping, stereotype formation and contents, and exploration of how and when stereotypic information is activated.
3. Social Cognition: Prejudice and effective interventions: Examining intergroup prejudice and the interventions designed to reduce its negative effects.
4. Social Cognition:Self-processing: How self-processing systems shape attention, perception and memory.
5. Lifespan: The development of bias: Exploring patterns of stereotype development across childhood and adulthood, and their links to social and cognitive development. How self-processing systems develop across childhood, adolescence and old age, impacting the effects of self on cognition.
6. Lifespan: Relationships and the irresistible influence of first impressions: Evolutionary social psychology (universality and individual differences). The impact of surface characteristics on perception and memory. Why might we approach some people differently?
7. Applications: Examining the effectiveness of applied social cognition research, from education to intergroup behaviour.

PSY315 Description

This module will introduce you to some contemporary theoretical debates between psychologists, with individual sessions reflecting the research specialism of staff. You will build on existing skills in critically evaluating peer reviewed research and reflecting on how theoretical knowledge is applied to the development of research questions, with a view to informing your own research interests.

Aims

The aim of this module is to refine students’ skills in critically evaluating the peer-reviewed literature and understanding conceptual debates and advanced concepts within psychology. Through active participation in weekly classes, students will see how the core domains of psychology underpin the development of research questions and will be introduced to ‘hot topics’ examined in psychological research at Abertay and beyond. Students will develop their own theoretical precision and ability to critically evaluate the peer-reviewed literature. This will benefit students in drawing on evidence to make well rounded and well informed arguments in many different contexts.

Indicative Content
1. ‘Meta-science’ and current directions in psychological science: Building on existing knowledge and considering how ‘meta-science’ reduces waste and improves the quality of scientific output, by using the scientific method to study the processes involved in science itself.
2. Critical evaluation of current research topics and approaches: Staff sessions on their own field of expertise. Critically evaluating a scientific research seminar from an external speaker. Triangulation and insight garnered from diverse approaches (e.g., qualitative, biological, comparative, cross-cultural). Reflection on future research directions.
3. Applications of Psychological Science: Using recent examples to critically evaluate applied psychological approaches. Secondary data analysis. What do scientists mean by ‘impact’?

PSY313 Description

This module starts with an examination of miscarriage of justice cases and the lessons we can learn from them. Wrongful convictions continue to occur where innocent people are imprisoned, or even executed, based on inaccurate eyewitness evidence. There will be in depth discussions of factors affecting eyewitness memory, such as age, delay, and interview format. This module will examine how psychological theories and experimental evidence can inform procedures applied in investigative interviews and in court rooms.

Aims

Apply concepts, theories, and models from social and cognitive psychology to the investigative and legal context. Identify which psychological factors may affect eyewitness performance. Critically evaluate procedures and tools used to facilitate witness recall.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Describe different types of research paradigms that have been used in applied settings.
2. Critically evaluate psychological research evidence and theoretical frameworks that help us understand and explain why witness evidence is sometimes unreliable.
3. Articulate how psychological research and theory translates into practice, specifically investigative interviewing, and legal practice.
4. Identify tools and procedures that might support witnesses and victims when giving evidence.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Sport and Exercise course.

Module 1: SPS201 Psychology for Sport and Exercise

Module 2: SPS203 Key Concepts in Sport and Exercise Physiology

Module 3: Please contact studyabroad@abertay.ac.uk to check other options for the 3rd module.

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Sport and Exercise and related Sport courses.

Choose 3 of the following:

SPS301 Coaching and Learning

SPS305 Fundamentals of Strength Conditioning

SPS310 Physiological Adaptations for Performance

SPS313 Social Issues in Sport and Exercise

SPS314 Health Related Fitness Assessment and Programming

SPS201 Description

The overall purpose of this module is to develop students’ understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology and how these apply to real world environments. This will be achieved by explicitly addressing students’ knowledge of affect, behaviour and cognition within relevant contexts. They will examine intrapersonal and interpersonal factors and explore how these factors both shape and are shaped by involvement in sport and exercise.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of core psychological processes related to sport and exercise.
2. Explain psychological concepts that underpin performance at the individual level.
3. Explain psychological concepts that underpin team processes.
4. Review, interpret and present data collected from appropriate psychological tests.

Indicative Content
1. Identifying psychological issues in sport and exercise
Students will look at how identify and discuss variety of psychological issues in sport. They will need to consider what these are and how they can be grouped (e.g., positive/negative experiences, mental skills etc.)
2. Fundamentals of sport and exercise psychology
Students will explore the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology. Examining the interaction of affect, behaviour and cognition and identifying how they manifest in sport and exercise contexts.
3. Individual factors
Students will learn about key individual factors that influence how individuals act and react. This will include topics such as personality, motivation, anxiety and attention.
4. Group processes
Students will learn about key group factors that influence how individuals act and react. This will include topics such as communication, social climate and group dynamics.
5. An introduction to psychological skills
Students will be introduced to core psychological skills training and learn how they are applied and their limitations.

SPS203 Description

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise physiology and the application to performance, exercise and health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of core bioenergetic processes related to sport, exercise and health.
2. . Explain the role of the endocrine system in exercise and performance.
3. Explain the cardiovascular and respiratory response during exercise.
4. 4. Develop an understanding of fatigue and lactate metabolism in relation to exercise performance.
5. Develop key skills in research through data collection, analysis and interpretation.

Indicative Content
1. Fundamentals of bioenergetics
Students will explore the core concepts of energy production during exercise, examining the interaction of the different energy systems during exercise and how these change with inactivity.
2. Regulation of energy systems
Students will learn about hormonal and neural factors that influence the availability and regulation of fuel metabolism at rest and during exercise in health and disease.
3. Cardiovascular and respiratory system in sport and exercise
Students will learn about the determinants of exercising muscle oxygenation and its regulation by the cardiovascular and respiratory system, the regulation of arterial blood pressure during exercise and the interaction between oxygenation and arterial blood pressure.
4. Fatigue
Students will develop an understanding of both neuromuscular and skeletal muscle fatigue and the potential mechanisms resulting in the development of fatigue.
5. Physiological Testing
Students will explore a number of physiological tests that are used routinely for health assessment, developing an understanding of the tests and their limitations. Students will also learn how to carry out different physiological tests and analyse and interpret the results.

SPS301 Description

The overall purpose of this module is to develop students’ understanding of the concepts of coaching and learning and to apply these to physical activity environments. This will be achieved by explicitly addressing students’ knowledge of education and pedagogy and their ability to apply that knowledge in a suitable context. Students will move beyond a reductionist view of coaching simply as a systematic procedure and have students consider and discuss the influence of the social aspects of coaching such as leadership, relationships, and social environments.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the concept of coaching and learning through a model−based approach while giving them the basis for the conceptual study of sports coaching.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically explain how the concept of pedagogy and education apply to physical activity environments.
2. Analyse how different theoretical models describe the constituent parts of the coaching process and the coach’s role within this process.
3. Appraise the practical application of skill acquisition to coaching within physical activity environments.
4. Explain different participant groups, stages of development and environments and evaluate their impact on the coaching process.

Indicative Content
1. Coaching and learning
Students will consider the definition and purpose of coaching and learning. They will be asked to consider what is the purpose and definition of coaching, what it has to do with pedagogy and education.
2. The role of the coach
Students will be asked to consider the role of the coach, what their purpose is, and what they are trying to achieve. They will consider the level of participation, demands placed on coaches by external bodies, and coaches own philosophies towards the instruction of athletes.
3. The coaching process
Students will identify the key characteristics of coaching. They will consider a variety of leadership and relationship models and discuss how these fit into the idea of coaching as a systematic process.
4. Skill development
Students will examine the principles that underpin the creation on an efficient learning environment. They will consider modern theories of skill acquisition and how they relate to effective pedagogical.
5. Participant Groups
Students will consider different categorisations of participants and how this impacts on the planning and delivery of the coaching process.

SPS305 Description

This module is intended to introduce students to methods of training employed within a strength and conditioning context. You will learn some of the major underpinning physiological and biomechanical components of human performance, and scientifically justified periodized methods for training to achieve specific goals. You will also gain an understanding of the acute and chronic effects of particular forms of training and the relationship between particular exercises and the sporting context. This will be coupled with a development of weightlifting techniques and coaching.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the theoretical and practical knowledge of the fundamentals of strength and conditioning.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand the scientific underpinnings of human force production.
2. Demonstrate theoretical knowledge in various forms of training methods.
3. Identify the SC requirements of various sports and design periodized short term programmes dealing with specific elements of these.
4. Demonstrate practical competency and technical knowledge of weightlifting techniques.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to SC/ Functional Screening
Introduction to key terminology/concepts of SC and a fundamental understanding of basic functional athlete screening.
2. Introduction to Human Movement
An introduction to human anatomy and the mechanics of human force production (e.g., planes of movement, lever systems).
3. Introduction to Compound lifting
Introduction to the major compound exercises (e.g., Back/Front Squat, Dead−Lift, Bent−Over Row, Bench Press and an introduction to Weightlifting derivatives) with Key technical elements and coaching points associated with each lift.
4. Neuromuscular Physiology
Neuromuscular physiology and fibre types.
5. Plyometric Training
An introduction to the fundamental principles underpinning Plyometric Training (Stretch−Shortening −Cycle) and an understanding of the key technical coaching points.
8. Sports Nutrition
Principles of periodised sports nutrition for S&C training programmes.

SPS310 Description

The overall purpose of this module is to develop students’ understanding of the core physiological concepts that underpin performance. This will be achieved by explicitly addressing students’ knowledge of biochemical, cardiovascular and neuromuscular bases for performance and training the body for endurance, team and strength. Throughout this module, students will utilise both physiological and biomechanical equipment to allow them to explore and collect physiological data in relation to enhancing sports performance outcomes.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the physiology underpinning sports performance and its adaptation to training and ergogenic aids.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically evaluate the role of different physiological systems in performance
2. Analyse the physiological outcomes of training
3. Explain performance enhancement and evaluate different physiological strategies to improve performance
4. Synthesise performance testing with physiological concepts and training outcomes

Indicative Content
1. Biochemistry of performance
Students will explore the core concepts of energy production during sport and exercise, the metabolic processes and the rate limiting steps for performance and the metabolic adaptations to training.
2. Cardiovascular system and performance
Students will learn about cardiac output and blood flow regulation and cardiovascular adaptation to training.
3. Neuromuscular system and performance
Students will learn about the contractile mechanism, motor unit activation, neuromuscular fatigue and strength, power and speed performance.
4. Doping and performance
Students will develop an understanding of the role of doping in elite sport and the physiological adaptations to doping.
5. Training for performance
Students will explore different training modalities to improve endurance and anaerobic power and strength and how to plan energy specific programmes.

SPS313 Description

This module explores contemporary issues in sport and exercise, particularly those they are likely to encounter and have to navigate in their future employment.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : awareness and understanding of contemporary issues in sport and society.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify and provide examples of contemporary issues in sport and society.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of historical, cultural and comparative sensitivities within contemporary issues in sport and society.
3. Critically examine sport culture through application of social theory and empirical research.
4. Produce ideas for progressive development of sport and exercise based on critical analysis of contemporary social issues.

Indicative Content
1. Social theory
Students will learn key aspects of social theory that can be/ have been used to explain phenomena in sport and exercise.
2. Inequality and discrimination
Students will explore the main sources of inequality and discrimination in sport and exercise (e.g., gender, social class, ethnicity, LGBTI)
3. Sport and politics
Students will explore how various political systems/ ideologies and governing bodies use sport/athletes as a vehicle for social control.
4. Ethics and sport
Students will learn about moral and ethical issues in sport and exercise (e.g., child protection). Sport and exercise cultures provide a unique environment for moral and ethical issues.

SPS314 Description

The overall purpose of this module is to develop students understanding of physiological adaptations to exercise from a health related viewpoint. This will be achieved by detailing salient acute and chronic adaptations from the whole− body level down to the cellular level. Students will examine acute and chronic outcomes of training to improve health and how to assess these outcomes using physiological tests. This module provides the opportunity to develop an understanding of how to use the results of testing data to schedule exercise programmes.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: an understanding of exercise adaptations that promote good health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the theoretical and scientific basis of health related fitness testing and training.
2. Explain and critique acute and chronic responses to exercise.
3. Critically appraise and be proficient in a range of assessments of health related fitness.

Indicative Content
1. Acute and chronic adaptation to training
Students will learn how the different physiological systems in the body adapt, both in the short term and longer term, to training.
2. Cellular physiology
Cellular physiology− students will learn some of the cellular adaptations that occur in the body in response to training.
3. Training for heath
Training for health− students will learn how to elucidate such adaptations through exercise training.
4. Testing for change
Students will learn a range of suitable tests to measure change in the body from a health related viewpoint.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Sport and Management course.

Module 1: SPS201 Psychology for Sport and Exercise

Module 2: BMT213 Theory and Practice in HRM

Module 3: Please contact studyabroad@abertay.ac.uk to check other options for the 3rd module.

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Sport and Management course.

Module 1: SPS313 Social Issues in Sport and Exercise

Module 2: BMT318 Fundamentals of Events Management

Module 3: BMT310 Recruitment and Talent Management

SPS201 Description

The overall purpose of this module is to develop students’ understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology and how these apply to real world environments. This will be achieved by explicitly addressing students’ knowledge of affect, behaviour and cognition within relevant contexts. They will examine intrapersonal and interpersonal factors and explore how these factors both shape and are shaped by involvement in sport and exercise.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of core psychological processes related to sport and exercise.
2. Explain psychological concepts that underpin performance at the individual level.
3. Explain psychological concepts that underpin team processes.
4. Review, interpret and present data collected from appropriate psychological tests.

Indicative Content
1. Identifying psychological issues in sport and exercise
Students will look at how identify and discuss variety of psychological issues in sport. They will need to consider what these are and how they can be grouped (e.g., positive/negative experiences, mental skills etc.)
2. Fundamentals of sport and exercise psychology
Students will explore the core concepts of sport and exercise psychology. Examining the interaction of affect, behaviour and cognition and identifying how they manifest in sport and exercise contexts.
3. Individual factors
Students will learn about key individual factors that influence how individuals act and react. This will include topics such as personality, motivation, anxiety and attention.
4. Group processes
Students will learn about key group factors that influence how individuals act and react. This will include topics such as communication, social climate and group dynamics.
5. An introduction to psychological skills
Students will be introduced to core psychological skills training and learn how they are applied and their limitations.

BMT213 Description

This module builds on students’ existing knowledge of human resource management and develops their understanding of HRM theory and practice.

Aims
The aim of this module is to develop students’ critical appraisal of the role of human resource management within contemporary organisations.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of key HRM concepts and practices;
2. Explain and evaluate the purpose and operation of HRM in contemporary organisations;
3. Demonstrate awareness of HRM-related social, cultural and environmental responsibilities in a global context.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to HRM
Theoretical perspectives to HRM; practical approaches to HRM
2. Context and HRM
National, international, occupational, organisational and individual contexts of HRM in theory and in practice
3. Strategic HRM
Introduction to strategic human resource management; ‘best fit’ and ‘best practice’ approaches
4. HRM, work and wellbeing
Fair work; dignity at work; mental health and stress at work; the benefits and challenges of flexibility
5. HRM, equality and diversity
Inequalities in the labour market and in the workplace; managing diverse workforce
6. Managing conflict in the workplace
Conflict in the employment relationship; misbehaviour, discipline and grievance procedures; bullying and harassment; disputes
7. Contemporary HRM trends and future challenges
Continuity and change in work and employment; gig economy; (ir)responsible HRM

SPS313 Description

This module explores contemporary issues in sport and exercise, particularly those they are likely to encounter and have to navigate in their future employment.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : awareness and understanding of contemporary issues in sport and society.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify and provide examples of contemporary issues in sport and society.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of historical, cultural and comparative sensitivities within contemporary issues in sport and society.
3. Critically examine sport culture through application of social theory and empirical research.
4. Produce ideas for progressive development of sport and exercise based on critical analysis of contemporary social issues.

Indicative Content
1. Social theory
Students will learn key aspects of social theory that can be/ have been used to explain phenomena in sport and exercise.
2. Inequality and discrimination
Students will explore the main sources of inequality and discrimination in sport and exercise (e.g., gender, social class, ethnicity, LGBTI)
3. Sport and politics
Students will explore how various political systems/ ideologies and governing bodies use sport/athletes as a vehicle for social control.
4. Ethics and sport
Students will learn about moral and ethical issues in sport and exercise (e.g., child protection). Sport and exercise cultures provide a unique environment for moral and ethical issues.

BMT318 Description

Fundamentals of Events Management

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with: an overview of successful events management; key considerations and stakeholder participation

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Describe and undertake the key phases of events management
2. Analyse a recent event and determine its challenges and where it succeeded and failed
3. Undertake an analysis and create a communications plan for stakeholder management
4. Demonstrate an ability to work with others to generate a digitally delivered end product

Indicative Content
1. Event Management as an industry
The current economic position of the industry. Recent events and how the industry is changing. The impact of technology on the industry. Types of events; The 5 ‘C’s of event management
2. Digital presentation
Creating and facilitating a Microsoft Teams meeting; using online tools for presentation of information (e.g. Moovly, Prezzie, videos)
3. Concept
Event Entrepreneurship Who, what, where, when and why. Deciding on the theme/branding for the event; Understanding your audience and how you will ‘reach’ them through your branding and advertising. Considering how the audience impacts on issues such as venue choice and how you will fulfil expectations
4. Coordination
Creating a schedule of activities; Finding, booking and organising suppliers; front and back of house staff recruitment and training; understanding stakeholder groups and managing them accordingly
5. Control
Conformance with legislation and regulatory frameworks e.g. supplier contracts, health & safety, employment How the budget should be managed; Making sure you have accounted for all costs; Getting quotes; sponsorship; additional revenue opportunities
6. Culmination
Ensuring everything is ready for opening; Managing people movement/control; Back-up planning
7. Closeout
Reviewing what has happened and learning from mistakes

BMT310 Description

This module focuses on the effective mobilisation of a workforce and how organisations can only function if they are able to assemble together individuals and teams of people with the necessary skills, attitudes and experience to meet their objectives. The module concentrates not only on the practical aspects of recruitment, selection, employee retention, dismissal but also on the strategic aspects to equip learners with the knowledge and skills required for resourcing and talent management within a global context.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student: with the skills and knowledge required to undertake core resourcing and talent management activities and to develop students understanding of how effective organisations develop a strategic approach to the attraction and retention of staff, analysing their key employment markets and gaining understanding of their dynamics so as to enable them to compete more effectively, both now and in the future

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate the major features of national and international employment market from which organisations source staff,
2. Suggest and justify appropriate recruitment, selection, induction activities to effectively, efficiently, lawfully and professionally recruit and retain talent;
3. Manage retirement, redundancy and dismissal practices fairly, efficiently and in accordance with the expectations of the law, ethical and professional practice.
4. Organise a recruitment interview for a given post.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction: The theoretical background: Employment Markets and Regulations. Resourcing Strategy. The Future of Work. Fairness and Diversity.
2. The Context of Employee Resourcing: Introduction; people and work; Global employment markets and regulation. The Fu.ture of work. Fairness and Diversity
3. Human Resource/Talent Planning: The meaning, purpose and importance of long and short term talent planning and succession planning; building long term organisational performance.
4. Job Analysis: Producing a Job Description: The meaning and importance of job analysis and role analysis; methods of conducting a job and role analysis and competency framework; job descriptions; person specifications.
5. Recruitment: Attracting the right people: The recruitment process: defining requirements; attracting applicants; sending and receiving information; making contacts. Recruitment methods: Advertising; the use of the internet and social media; Application forms and CVs; Internal and external recruitment.
6. Selection: Choosing the Right People: The selection process; sifting applications; shortlisting candidates; interviewing and other methods; Making an offer
7. Employee Retention: Employer branding; Induction; Talent management strategies
8. The management of retirement, redundancy and dismissal practices: Retirement. Dismissals. Redundancy.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Accounting and Finance course.

Module 1: LAW256 Business Law 

Module 2: ANF203 Management Accounting

Module 3: Please contact us to confirm your 3rd module choice

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Accounting and Finance course.

Module 1: ANF302 Taxation

Module 2: ANF303 International Financial Accounting

Module 3: Choose one of the following options:

ANF305 Financial Markets

BMT317 Public Policy and its effect on organisations

BMT322 Entrepreneurship and Business Start-up

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

LAW256 Description

In this module students will study the legal framework within which business organisations operate, and other legal concepts such as contract including employment, negligence and other delictual responsibilities, insolvency and the regulatory environment in which businesses must operate.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide the student with a clear understanding of core legal concepts and a clear understanding of the legal nature of business organisations and their regulation.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of the sources of law in Scotland and England, including the impact of the Human Rights Act 1998 and European law.
2. Explain the fundamental principles which govern the law of contract and the law of delict.
3. Demonstrate and understanding of employment law in relation to employment contracts, redundancy and dismissal.
4. Explain the principles relating to the laws of agency, partnership and company incorporation, with a focus on the formation and management of companies.
5. Explain the principles of the law of insolvency.

Indicative Content
1. Legal Systems: The nature of law; the distinction between civil and criminal law; the Scottish and English legal systems; the structure of the courts in Scotland and England; sources of law in the United Kingdom; European Union law and Institutions; Human Rights Act 1998; Scotland Act 1998
2. Law of Obligations – Contract, Employment and Delict: Nature and formation of contract; validity; contract terms; restrictive covenants; electronic contracts; breach of contract; remedies; employment contracts; dismissal from employment; redundancy; nature of delict; elements of negligence; causation; defences; professional negligence
3. Agency, Partnership and Incorporation: Creation of agency relationship and authority; relationship between agents and third parties; definition of partnership; relationship between partners and third parties; formation and constitution of companies; separate legal personality; lifting the corporate veil; minority protection
4. Management of companies: Directors and their duties; company officers and their responsibilities including auditors and secretaries; company meetings; resolutions; records; Bribery Act 2010; corporate criminal and fraudulent behaviour
5. Corporate Finance: Types, features and classes of share capital; issuing, allotting, paying and transferring shares, including to the general public; London Stock Exchange; dividends; loan capital; capital maintenance rules; debt finance;
6. Insolvency: Administration; receivership, including fixed and floating charges; liquidation.

ANF203 Description

This module extends the basics of management accounting in its role in shaping long term decisions, in planning and in control and presenting reports to management.

Aims
The aim of this module is to develop the students' ability to examine management accounting problems surrounding long term planning, control and decision making within the business unit.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. apply quantitative expertise in the use of appropriate management accounting techniques and account for the strengths and weaknesses of these methods.
2. explain the use of relevant management accounting theories and techniques in supporting business decisions.
3. work effectively as a member of a group, in providing a cohesive group presentation in response to a given assignment.

Indicative Content
1. Further issues in Costing
Overhead allocation, apportionment, absorption and preparation of overhead cost statements; compilation of process costing statements and joint costing statements using FIFO and Weighted Average considering opening and closing inventory valuation; throughput costing; techniques in short-term decision making- further issues
2. Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing
Cost-volume profit analysis for multi-product. Reconciliation of Absorption and Marginal costing profits: calculation of marginal and absorption cost of products and services.
3. Capital Investment Appraisal
Investment appraisal methods; Net Present Value, Payback, Internal Rate of Return and Accounting Rate of Return. Strengths and weaknesses of these methods. Sensitivity analysis applied to capital investment appraisal.
4. Working Capital
The nature and importance of working capital. Management of working capital. Determining working capital needs.
5. Variance Analysis
Various roles of budgets and their behavioural implications. Functional and flexed budgets. Calculation and interpretation of variances. Reconciliation of actual to planned performance by means of variances. Distinguish between planning and operational variances. Role of MRP and ERP systems in supporting standard costing systems. Material mix and yield variances, sales mix and quantity variances.

ANF302 Description

This module introducing the main principles of UK taxes for corporate bodies and individuals. The scope of taxes includes Corporation tax, Capital tax, personal taxation (whether as an employee, sole trader or partner in an unincorporated business), National Insurance, Inheritance taxes and Value Added Tax (VAT).

Aims
This module aims to advance students' understanding of the UK taxation system and the impact of various taxes; including corporation tax, individual’s taxation, the interaction between taxes; tax avoidance; overseas aspects of personal and corporate taxes. Additionally, the scope of study involves employee taxation (National Insurance) and sales tax (VAT).

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. demonstrate an understanding of the structure and administration of the UK tax system as it affects individuals and incorporated businesses;
2. prepare tax computations showing trading profits and losses for an unincorporated business. Compute an employer’s liability for National Insurance in respect of the employee and employer.
3. demonstrate an understanding of Value Added Tax; and when VAT is chargeable and recoverable by a business;
4. prepare capital gains tax and inheritance tax computations; understand and calculate the effect of ordinary residence and domicile on UK tax liabilities;
5. prepare computations showing the profits chargeable to corporation tax for UK companies;
6. prepare computations showing the offset of losses in UK companies and effectively apply the rules available within related Groups companies.

Indicative Content
1. Taxation
A general introduction to taxation. Appreciation of the administrative procedures followed by the tax authorities in assessing and collecting taxes.
2. Trading Income
The nature of business profits assessable under the UK tax system. The computation of taxable profits and basis of assessment. The calculation of capital allowances. Setting-off of income tax losses for businesses run by sole traders and partnerships.
3. Taxation of the Individual
Independent taxation. Sources of income including benefits in kind. Personal allowances and reliefs. Losses arising from property income. An employee’s liability for National Insurance contributions.
4. Value Added Tax
Principles, outputs and inputs, exemptions, zero rated, partly exempt businesses.
5. Corporation Tax and Corporate groups
Compilation of income assessable including capital gains. Rates of tax. Financial years and payment of tax. The effects of close company status.The use of losses in a single company context. The treatment of groups of companies and consortia. The application of capital gains tax provisions on transactions of companies.
6. Management of Personal Taxation
Calculation of capital gains/losses and liabilities arising on disposals. Principles of inheritance tax and treatment of liabilities arising on lifetime gifts and on death. Inter-relationship of taxes and identification of opportunities to minimise or defer taxation liabilities.
7. Tax planning and Overseas Taxation
Inter-relationship of taxes, planning, anti-avoidance and tax management. Overseas aspects of personal and corporate taxation.

ANF303 Description

This module covers the exploration of the application of Financial Accounting Theory and Practice to current issues in accounting, and development of international financial accounting theory and practice.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to develop the student's critical awareness of contemporary developments of international financial accounting in theory and practice.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically evaluate the conceptual framework of financial accounting.
2. Evaluate conceptual and practical issues in accounting for assets, liabilities, gains and losses.
3. Determine the accounting treatment of specified financial transactions based on knowledge and understanding of conceptual models including acquisition and equity accounting in groups.
4. critically appraise contemporary issues concerning asset and liability measurement and disclosure of provisions, leases and pension.

Indicative Content
1. Statements of cash flows IAS7
Preparation of statements of cash flows. Cash and cash equivalents; classification of cash flows by activities, Indirect and direct methods. The Interests, dividends and taxes on cash flows. Working capital changes and cash flows.
2. Accounting for Groups
The conceptual basis of accounting for the investment of one entity in another entity; preparation of group accounts including inter-company balances, unrealised profit on inter-company sales and acquisitions during the year.
3. Accounting treatments under IAS and IFRS
Provisions IAS37, post balance sheet events IAS10 Leases, IAS17, IFRS16 Financial instruments. IAS32, IAS39, IFRS7, IFRS9

ANF305 Description

An introduction to Financial Markets and Institutions.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the role, functions and tools of the financial services industry in the context of both domestic economies and the world economy.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand current issues affecting financial markets and institutions and their customers;
2. Understand the workings of financial markets and institutions and the flow of funds between global markets.

Indicative Content
1. Money and the Financial System
The Six Parts of the Financial System; What is Money and How Can We Measure It?; The Payment System.
2. Bond Markets and Interests Rates
The Bond Market and the Determination of Interests Rates; Ratings and the Risk Structure of Interests Rates; The Yield Curve; Theories of the Term Structure of Interests Rates.
3. Stock Markets and Derivatives
The Essential Characteristics of Common Stock; Measuring the Level of the Stock Market; Investing in Stocks for the Long Run; What are Derivatives?; Forwards and Futures; Options; Swaps.
4. Financial Institutions
The Role of Financial Intermediaries; Information Asymmetries and Information Costs; Bank Management; Bank Risk: Where it comes from and what to do about it?
5. Central Banking and Monetary Policy
Understanding the Central Bank's Balance Sheet; Monetary Base; the Money Multiplier and Money Supply; Monetary Policy; Unconventional Monetary Policy Tools.
6. Regulation and Financial Crises
The Need for Regulating the Financial System; The Government Safety Net; Regulation and Supervision of the Financial System; Financial Crises.
7. Foreign Exchange
Exchange Rates Determination and Foreign Exchange Markets.
8. Current Topics on Financial Markets and Institutions
The Euro Debate; Socially Responsible Investment; Islamic Finance; Microcredit.

BMT317 Description

In this module students will develop the skills to assess, analyse and evaluate the impacts of the policy making process to organisations business in terms of the economic and broader social contributions it makes. In addition it will help provide a foundation for students to understand the important and complex role that government plays with all businesses, including businesses focused on sustainability the effect of public policy on business, the factors that influence public policy, the different views of the relationship between business and government, and the occurrence of market failures and the role of public policy.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with a critical and theoretical understanding of policy development and its effects on organisations and vis versa.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the public policy process
2. Apply theories and frameworks to the understand of policy implementation
3. Analyse and Evaluate strengths and limitations of public policies on organisations through case studies

Indicative Content
1. What is public policy: PP is the process by which governments translate their political vision and ideologies into programmes and actions to deliver outcomes and desired changes in the real world.
2. The policy process: Explore the foundations, importance and goals of public policy by exploring the stages of the policy cycle and the political factors that influence each stage
3. Theories of power and the policy process: Apply the theory learned from the course such as, Rational Actor Theory and Institutional theory and apply it to real-world policy case studies
4. How organisations shape and impact on policy: Explain how organisations and industry representatives such as lobbyist can inform, persuade, pressure and influence governments, policy makers and public policy and to help serve their interest
5. Public policy and the operation of organisations: Explain how public policies and government influence markets for sustainable businesses; Understand why public policy is important to sustainable business and business more generally; Discuss the key influencers and impacts this relationship of public policy and why public policymaking does not always serve the public interest

BMT322 Description

This module introduces students the skills and knowledge needed to launch a small business successfully. This module defines and helps students acquire the personal and professional skills needed in order to develop a professional career and/or to succeed as entrepreneurs in Small and Medium sized Enterprises (SMEs).

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the opportunity to: 1. To raise awareness of self-employment as a career option. 2. Understand and analyse the role of the entrepreneur in the process of business start-up and development. 3. Develop and practice the skills necessary to operate effectively as entrepreneurs in the small business sector.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Reflect on the skills and qualities they possess and analyse how these relate to the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs;
2. Understand the skills and approaches the entrepreneur brings to the process of value creation;
3. Design a simple business plan which demonstrates the commercial viability of a proposed small business start-up

Indicative Content
1. What makes an entrepreneur?
An introduction to entrepreneurship and an analysis of the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs
2. Business Ideas
Strategies for generating successful business ideas
3. Environmental scanning
Identifying a good business idea and the future direction of our organisation
4. Business Plans
Developing a credible business plan that includes evaluating business ideas Assessing risk and uncertainty; identifying potential customers, markets and market segments; assessing operations, USP and competition; price vs quality & profits.
5. Getting finance
Presenting the business idea; different potential sources of finance

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Biomedical Science course.

Module 1: FOR212 Investigative Analytical Science

Module 2: LSC201 Molecular Biology and Genetics

Module 3: choose 20 Credits worth of MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of BSc Biomedical Science course.

Module 1: LSC305 Applications Mini Project

Module 2: LSC306 Test tube to tablet

Module 3: LSC310 Advanced methods in biomedical science

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for MySuccess options.

FOR212 Description

A module designed to teach basic analytical skills and the theory behind these techniques, and to relate them to forensic and biomedical applications

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of basic analytical techniques.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Select, describe and apply analytical methods
2. Apply, interpret and report statistical tests for data analysis
3. Carry out a range of specified analyses

Indicative Content
1. Quality
Sample custody and traceability. Data interpretation and reporting.
2. Sample Preparation
Sampling. Drying. Crushing. Weighing. Dissolution. Separation and concentration.
3. Spectroscopy
Electromagnetic radiation and the nature of light. Beer Lambert law. Theory of spectroscopy. Instrumentation. UV-visible, IR and AAS spectroscopy. Presumptive tests. Spectroscopic
4. Theory and Principles of Chromatography
Introduction to TLC.
5. Immunotechnology
Diagnostic and detection systems based on antibody-antigen interaction: RIA, ELISA, Agglutination, Precipitation reactions. Direct, Indirect and sandwich assays. Use of serological methods in diagnosis of infectious diseases and forensic applications such as body fluid identification

LSC201 Description

This module provides an introduction to both Medical and Forensic genetics and uses specific examples, to highlight the importance of DNA analyses, in both fields.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an in-depth understanding of the fundamental concepts in molecular biology and genetics, together with relevant skills.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Explain the architecture, expression of human genes which are important in determining health, disease and forensically useful phenotypes.
2. Discuss both clinical and forensic genetic variation in the context of human genomics.
3. Deploy molecular genetic laboratory and bioinformatic analytical techniques.

Indicative Content
1. Genes and gene expression
Structure of human genes. Control of gene expression, with an emphasis on variations in genes that cause both medical conditions and common, forensically useful human traits. Splicing and differential gene expression. Common human variations and Mutations, including point mutations, indels, repeat expansions, and chromosomal aberrations.
2. Human Genomics and bioinformatic analysis
Sequence architecture of the human genome. Chromosome structure. DNA sequencing methods: Focusing on the comparison of the dideoxy irreversible terminator method of Sanger, with the “next generation” reversible terminator method of Balasubramanian and Klenerman. Analysis of sequence data. Genetic variation: the human gene pool, population genetics including Hardy-Weinberg equilibria.
3. Genetic engineering and other analytical techniques
Basic cloning including restriction digestion, ligation and transfection. PCR, Gel and capillary electrophoresis and accurate sizing of DNA fragments.

LSC305 Description

In order to be a confident and effective laboratory scientist it is necessary to understand all processes involved in experimental design/assay development and testing. This module is designed to equip students with the necessary basic practical/analytical skills and theoretical knowledge to be reliable and independent laboratory workers.

Aims
The aim of this practical based module is to give the student an understanding and experience of the complexity of independent experimental design/assay development in keeping with Quality by Design theory and testing and data analysis from first principles.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Define a testable hypothesis/research question.
2. Design, execute and optimise an experimental plan (to include assay/equipment, controls, replicates, statistical tests/theory/COSHH/H&S).
3. Apply knowledge of statistical analysis to the evaluation of data and the design of experimental protocols.
4. Demonstrate an understanding of the theory/principles behind the practical techniques.
5. Demonstrate knowledge of the underlying biology.

Indicative Content
1. Experimental design & statistics/data analysis
Determining objectives and specifying hypothesis; factors, levels, blocking and randomisation; use of appropriate statistical tests, using the statistical package SPSS
3. Mini investigation
Carry out a mini project in which a variety of experimental methods are applied and critically evaluated (the exact nature of the techniques used will depend on the nature of the project and will vary).
4. Information literacy
Plan and conduct literature search, making use of a wide range of resources, including full-text and abstracting databases as well as reference management software.
5. Principles of experimental techniques
Demonstrate a detailed knowledge of experimental techniques used in the execution of the mini-project including specific strengths and limitations.

LSC306 Description

This module is about the process of turning basic biological research into an end product e.g. a drug, licenced for clinical use. Stages of the process discussed include drug design, pharmacodynamics to identify efficacy, pharmacokinetics and clinical trials. The essential roles of process management and quality by design in meeting the demands of regulatory bodies will be introduced.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with a detailed understanding of the pre-clinical and clinical stages of drug development.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically discuss the process of drug development from drug target identification and basic pharmacology to product development and licensing.
2. Evaluate clinical trial data and understand the basis of clinical trial design.
3. Understand the importance of the link between knowledge and management of a process and the quality and successful licencing of the final product.

Indicative Content
1. Process and quality management
Process and quality management as key themes throughout drug development: Good laboratory practice, good clinical practice and good manufacturing practice. The role of Quality by Design, Regulatory Affairs and quality assurance in drug licencing. The role of MHRA and FDA, etc.
2. Identifying and developing candidate drug molecules
Examining clinical drivers, QSAR, high-throughput-screening, intellectual property.
3. Cellular structures as drug targets
Cellular structures as drug targets focusing mainly on cell surface receptors: Pharmacodynamics of drug-receptor binding. Quantifying drug efficacy and binding in vitro.
4. Preclinical development
Pharmacokinetics, toxicity studies in animal models.
5. Clinical Trials
Clinical Trials Good Clinical Practice, Phase I to IV of clinical trials. Study design trial, sources of bias, recruitment, and sample size, analysis of data Per-protocol/intention to treat analysis.
6. Guest Lecturer from Industry
Product development and marketing
7. Large scale manufacturing
Large scale manufacturing, Regulatory approval, post market monitoring (Phase (IV)

LSC310 Description

This module provides underpinning theory and hands on practical experience in key laboratory methods in biomedical research and diagnostics, including the principles on which they are based, their optimisation, application and interpretation.

Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:
• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively.
• Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.

Aims

This module aims to provide you with a practical and theoretical knowledge of a range of standard and cutting-edge methods typically used in biomedical science, and a critical appreciation of their limitations and advantages and their use in research and diagnostics.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate practical competence in a range of methods used in biomedical research and diagnostics
2. Use theory and practice to trouble shoot different methods
3. Design, optimise and execute the measurement of a key target protein, gene or metabolite and report the findings in an appropriate format
4. Critically appraise the use of a range of methods in answering different questions in biomedical science

Indicative Content
1. Core techniques: PCR and qPCR: Theory and practice of all steps in standard PCR and qPCR, including RNA extraction, quantification and quality checks, primer design, testing and optimisation, relative versus absolute quantification, and final analysis
2. Core techniques: Western blotting and other immuno-based methods: Theory and practice of all steps in western blotting including protein extraction and measurement, selection of antibodies, SDS-PAGE, transfer, antibody exposure and imaging; Theory of immunohistochemistry, CHiP and other antibody based approaches
3. Core techniques: Reporter assays: Exploring the presence of response elements in gene promoters and their activation using reporter based technologies, such as CALUX
4. Cutting edge methods and industry application: Differences between targeted and global approaches and their underpinning theory, eg. next generation gene sequencing, ChipSEQ, proteomics, epigenetic sequencing, and lipidomics Development and application of techniques in industry

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Business Management/Business & Human Resource Management courses.

Module 1: BMT215 Budgeting and Cases in Events Management or BMT209 Digital Marketing Principles and Campaigns

Module 2: BMT202 Project Management

Module 3: Choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Business Management course. Please choose three of the following:

BMT322 Entrepreneurship and Business Start-up

ANF305 Financial Markets

BMT307 Managing Across Cultures

BMT303 The Future of Work

BMT313 Prescriptive Analytics

BMT317 Public Policy and its effect on organisations

BMT215 Description

This module covers some of the financial imperatives in managing an event and explores the impact of festivals and events on their host communities.

Aims
The aim of this module is to give students the skill and knowledge required to manage the finance of an event and assess the direct and indirect impacts of festivals and events on the host community through a case study approach.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Explain the nature and issues surrounding sponsorship of events
2. Using a pre-written budget, design a break-even analysis for an event
3. Discuss and use the control mechanisms used in the budgeting process
4. Identify the economic, environmental and social impacts of events and festivals on the host communities.
5. Evaluate the economic, environmental and social impacts of events and festivals on the host communities.

Indicative Content
1. Sources of funding - Determining where funding will come from for your event; funding policies; funding applications to external sponsors; convincing sponsors of the benefits of funding your event
2. Budgeting and Breakeven - Understanding the types of costs involved in the project; Preparing a simple budget and analysing a complex (pre-prepared) budget; Creating a break-even analysis
3. Controlling finances - Pre-event controls, operational controls, post control mechanisms
4. Introduction: The theoretical background - Basic concepts, ideas, principles of festivals, events and communities; Forces-Stressors-State-Impact-Response (FPSIR) model).
5. Types of Events - Local community events to mega and online events.
6. Impact of events - Nature of impacts, impact assessments; Economic, social, environmental, tourism, political, psychological.
7. Future of events - Introduction to the future, industry perception of events future; future trends and issues. Live streaming.
8. Stakeholders - Stakeholder theory Corporate Social Responsibility theory.
9. Case studies in events

BMT209 Description

This module provides students with an understanding of the importance of digital technology and various digital marketing communications tools in the marketing function in today’s organisation. The module equips students with an understanding of the process of analysing the success of digital marketing strategies.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with an in-depth understanding of the digital marketing environment, the relevant tools of digital marketing communication and the process of developing effective digital marketing strategies and analysing the data outcomes.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate the efficiency of an organisation’s digital presence in achieving its marketing objectives.
2. Develop digital marketing solutions for specified marketing problems.
3. Discuss the various tools of digital marketing for an organisations’ marketing communications needs.
4. Evaluate the success of devised digital marketing strategies.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to digital marketing - Discussing the impact of digital transformation on the marketing function. Creating digital strategies that are integrated within the wider marketing strategy and support the organisational goals and objectives.
2. Understanding the digital marketing environment - Examining the internal and external facets of the digital environment that the company operates within including competitors, the digital consumer and the wider digital landscape.
3. The Planning Process - Exploring the models and methods of planning your digital strategies based on audit data, social listening and company objectives.
4. Media and Tools Planning - Selecting the appropriate tools and media to use to support the implementation of the digital marketing strategy.
5. Social Media Marketing and Mobile Marketing - The nature and platforms of social media. The various mobile marketing tools and their role within the wider digital marketing strategy.
6. Paid Search, Online Advertising and Content Marketing - Exploring the tools of display and video advertising on online platforms. Using a relationship marketing approach to your digital marketing with tools of email marketing and content marketing. Enhancing website performance using web optimisation, paid search and SEO/SEM.
7. Digital Campaign Tracking - The process of tracking campaign data on digital media using methods. The tools of the trade, e.g. Google Analytics for analysing success of digital marketing campaigns via monitoring relevant metrics and KPIs.
8. Data Driven Decision-Making - Applying a strategic approach to collecting digital metrics. Exploring the decisions made using metrics and analytics.

BMT202 Description

This module examines the tools and techniques associated with managing projects. Students will also carry out an investigation into a project failure and recommend alternative actions which could have been taken

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with: an appreciation of the complexity of project management and the tools and techniques performed to aid successful management.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Select, use and explain the various tools and techniques which form part of the project planning and management process.
2. Analyse a project case study and identify where improvements could have been made.

Indicative Content
1. Project management and project teams
Intepreting project specifications and objectives, and the requirements of project stakeholders; Key project challenges for individuals and groups: reviewing the key priorities of time and project management; Understanding the role of a project leader; Understanding team work and how effective teams function; Creating and contributing to effective project teams; Managing teams through project delivery; maintaining goal focus, and managing problems.
2. Project analysis and planning
Analysing project requirements and sub-tasks; Estimating timelines; deadlines and milestones and activity durations; Constructing a project schedule; Resourcing projects; Allocating and smoothing resources; Using Gantt charts to allocate and monitor resource allocation; Project management tools; Using project management software.
3. Managing Projects
Dealing with project risk; Evaluating the probability and potential impact of risk; contingency planning for risk management; project tracking and revision to completion; Evaluating project delivery and management: Analysing the effectiveness of project management processes and the impact of project delivery and non-delivery.
4. Project Management Methodologies
The use of project management methodologies such as Prince2 and SCRUM.

BMT322 Description

This module introduces students the skills and knowledge needed to launch a small business successfully. This module defines and helps students acquire the personal and professional skills needed in order to develop a professional career and/or to succeed as entrepreneurs in Small and Medium sized Enterprises (SMEs).

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : The opportunity to: 1. To raise awareness of self-employment as a career option. 2. Understand and analyse the role of the entrepreneur in the process of business start-up and development. 3. Develop and practice the skills necessary to operate effectively as entrepreneurs in the small business sector.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Reflect on the skills and qualities they possess and analyse how these relate to the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs;
2. Understand the skills and approaches the entrepreneur brings to the process of value creation;
3. Design a simple business plan which demonstrates the commercial viability of a proposed small business start-up

Indicative Content
1. What makes an entrepreneur?
An introduction to entrepreneurship and an analysis of the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs
2. Business Ideas
Strategies for generating successful business ideas
3. Environmental scanning
Identifying a good business idea and the future direction of our organisation
4. Business Plans
Developing a credible business plan that includes evaluating business ideas Assessing risk and uncertainty; identifying potential customers, markets and market segments; assessing operations, USP and competition; price vs quality & profits.
5. Getting finance
Presenting the business idea; different potential sources of finance

ANF305 Description

An introduction to Financial Markets and Institutions.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the role, functions and tools of the financial services industry in the context of both domestic economies and the world economy.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand current issues affecting financial markets and institutions and their customers;
2. Understand the workings of financial markets and institutions and the flow of funds between global markets.

Indicative Content
1. Money and the Financial System
The Six Parts of the Financial System; What is Money and How Can We Measure It?; The Payment System.
2. Bond Markets and Interests Rates
The Bond Market and the Determination of Interests Rates; Ratings and the Risk Structure of Interests Rates; The Yield Curve; Theories of the Term Structure of Interests Rates.
3. Stock Markets and Derivatives
The Essential Characteristics of Common Stock; Measuring the Level of the Stock Market; Investing in Stocks for the Long Run; What are Derivatives?; Forwards and Futures; Options; Swaps.
4. Financial Institutions
The Role of Financial Intermediaries; Information Asymmetries and Information Costs; Bank Management; Bank Risk: Where it comes from and what to do about it?
5. Central Banking and Monetary Policy
Understanding the Central Bank's Balance Sheet; Monetary Base; the Money Multiplier and Money Supply; Monetary Policy; Unconventional Monetary Policy Tools.
6. Regulation and Financial Crises
The Need for Regulating the Financial System; The Government Safety Net; Regulation and Supervision of the Financial System; Financial Crises.
7. Foreign Exchange
Exchange Rates Determination and Foreign Exchange Markets.
8. Current Topics on Financial Markets and Institutions
The Euro Debate; Socially Responsible Investment; Islamic Finance; Microcredit.

BMT307 Description

In this module students will be introduced to current thinking on the effects of globalisation and culture on management practice and how national cultures shape the processes of employee development and organisational performance.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the different approaches to managing resources in different cultural settings and of the practical challenges of cross-cultural management in a global context.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the relationship between national culture, organisational behaviour and management practice;
2. Evaluate the effects of globalisation/internationalisation of business and politics on local management, national resources and cultural values;
3. Analyse the recent trends and developments in cross−cultural management and to assess their effects on international trade and business.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction: The theoretical background
The meaning and importance of managing across− cultures, perceptions and models of culture and cultural differences in organisation theory and management studies. The context and dimensions of managing across cultures, convergence and divergence theories, and classification of the different approaches to managing in different countries.
2. Managing in the Anglo−Saxon countries
Analysing the Anglo-Saxon approach to management; Managing in the USA and the UK.
3. Managing in Asian Countries
Effects of Confucianism, Communism and economic dynamism on management and organisation in East Asia countries; Managing in China, Japan and South Korea.
4. Managing in Western European Countries
Analysing the Francophone, the Germanic and other European models of management. The impact of the EU integration and expansion on employment and labour markets. Managing in France and Germany.
5. Managing in Less Developed Countries
From colonialism to dependency: the impact of international trade, transfer of knowledge and technology, ideologies and religious beliefs on management (mismanagement) and organisation in less developed countries. Managing in selected African and Middle−Eastern countries.
6. Contemporary issues of cross−cultural management
Global ethics and global labour markets: Gender, race, disability and age concerns. International organizations' responses to changing demographics; International organizations' responses to skills shortages. International approaches to managing diversity; and the use of IT in International HRM.

BMT303 Description

This module examines how the complexities, dynamics and uncertainties of the contemporary business environment impacts on the organisation of work and the contemporary employment relationship.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with :skills of analysis needed to assess the impact of a turbulent globalised business environment upon the future of management, the nature of work and the the employment relationship.

Learning Outcome

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Examine the impact of changing business contexts on complex organisations and the resulting critical challenges.
2. Examine the changing nature of work and new employment relationships.
3. Assess the interplay of power, politics and conflict management in decision making and business operations.
4. Evaluate the contribution of HR interventions in the future development of human capital with particular reference to knowledge intensive organisations. development of human capital with particular reference to knowledge intensive organisations.

Indicative Content
1. The future working context: The changing context of work, post-bureaucratic society, Millennial, and high-performance work contexts.
2. The new employment relationship and new forms of control: Flexible work and the precariat, The changing nature of capital - emotional and aesthetic labour; The psychological contract.
3. Conflict in the workplace: The changing nature of power and politics in organisational decision-making and management practice. The changing nature of contemporary employee relations; organisational misbehaviour and counter-productive work behaviours.
4. Human capital development: The learning organisation and organisational learning, technology-mediated work processes, talent sourcing and human capability and knowledge management; career planning and development, rewards and recognition.
5. Outcomes: Learning from high performance organisations; Engaging employees, employee engagement and discretionary effort; building organisational resilience.

BMT313 Description

This module expands on the material covered in business analytics by providing students with the necessary theory and techniques to perform predictive and prescriptive analytics in a business context. Prescriptive analytics differs from descriptive and predictive analytics in that prescriptive analytics indicates a course of action to take.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide students with the theory and techniques to perform business analysis using predictive and prescriptive analytics.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate statistical models and apply them using past data for prediction purposes.
2. Prescribe the best course of action based on data and statistical techniques.

Indicative Content
1. Predictive Data Mining: In these lectures, we discuss data sampling, preparation and partitioning; performance measures; the logistic regression; and classification and regression trees.
2. Spreadsheet Models: In these lectures, we learn some useful Excel functions for modelling and construct predictive and prescriptive models.
3. Monte Carlo Simulation: The goal of these lectures is to introduce students to simulation and apply the techniques learned to specific business cases.
4. Mathematical Optimization: In these lectures, we cover the main optimization techniques that will be used in the rest of the module.
5. Linear Optimization Models: In these lectures, we explore linear programming techniques.
6. Integer Linear Optimization ModelsIn these lectures, we explore the different types of integer linear optimization models and apply excel solver to find solutions.
7. Decision Analysis: In these lectures, we study decision analysis with and without probabilities, and decision analysis with sample information.

BMT317 Description

In this module students will develop the skills to assess, analyse and evaluate the impacts of the policy making process to organisations business in terms of the economic and broader social contributions it makes. In addition it will help provide a foundation for students to understand the important and complex role that government plays with all businesses, including businesses focused on sustainability the effect of public policy on business, the factors that influence public policy, the different views of the relationship between business and government, and the occurrence of market failures and the role of public policy.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with a critical and theoretical understanding of policy development and its effects on organisations and vis versa.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the public policy process
2. Apply theories and frameworks to the understand of policy implementation
3. Analyse and Evaluate strengths and limitations of public policies on organisations through case studies

Indicative Content
1. What is public policy: PP is the process by which governments translate their political vision and ideologies into programmes and actions to deliver outcomes and desired changes in the real world.
2. The policy process: Explore the foundations, importance and goals of public policy by exploring the stages of the policy cycle and the political factors that influence each stage
3. Theories of power and the policy process: Apply the theory learned from the course such as, Rational Actor Theory and Institutional theory and apply it to real-world policy case studies
4. How organisations shape and impact on policy: Explain how organisations and industry representatives such as lobbyist can inform, persuade, pressure and influence governments, policy makers and public policy and to help serve their interest
5. Public policy and the operation of organisations: Explain how public policies and government influence markets for sustainable businesses; Understand why public policy is important to sustainable business and business more generally; Discuss the key influencers and impacts this relationship of public policy and why public policymaking does not always serve the public interest

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BEng Civil and Environmental Engineering course.

Module 1: EEM207 Engineering Science 3

Module 2: EEM206 Structural Engineering 1

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 4th year of the BEng Civil and Environmental Engineering course. This option should only be selected by Engineering students in their 4th or 5th year of studies.

Modules to be confirmed: Please email international@abertay.ac.uk if you are interested in this pathway.

EEM207 Description

To examine the properties and application of a range of construction materials, to introduce the principles of highway design and to explore the application of Building Information Modelling

Aims
The aim of this module is to examine properties and application of a range of construction materials and to give the students an introductory understanding of Highway design and Building Information Modelling

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Discuss the benefits and limitations of Building Information Modelling (BIM)
2. Evaluate road scheme proposals and traffic management systems and design of a road alignment.
3. Examine the properties and applications of a variety of construction materials and associated test procedures including the appropriateness (including Health and Safety)of construction materials for different construction applications.

Indicative Content
1. Properties and Uses of Materials
Origin, occurrence, appearances, identification, classification, properties, manufacture, conversion, production and uses of various construction materials; material selection and specification, sustainability of materials.
2. Materials Testing
Testing and evaluation applied to common construction materials
3. Highway Engineering: Road Alignment:
Theory and practice in the layout of vertical and horizontal curvature. Road realignment project with a focus on sustainability. Computer based road design packages. Influence of safety on design solutions.
4. Highway Intersections:
Layout and analysis of priority junctions, roundabouts, signal control and grade- separated interchanges. Influence of safety on design solutions. Highway Materials, Design and Construction Pavement construction: flexible and rigid pavements, bound and unbound materials, mix design, specification for materials and construction, testing. Pavement loading, design of flexible and rigid pavements. Sustainability and recycling issues.
5. Highway Pavements
Design and Construction Pavement construction: flexible and rigid pavements, bound and unbound materials, mix design, specification for materials and construction, testing. Pavement loading, design of flexible and rigid pavements. Sustainability and recycling issues.
6. BIMs
BIM in practice, BIM in cost estimation and control. BIM in cost estimation and control.

EEM206 Description

A development of advanced structural analysis and design. Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps with confidence and self-awareness.
• Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers in their communities, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement to make a difference to people’s lives.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be responsive and responsible in personal, cultural and social contexts.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : An understanding of advanced structural analysis and basic structural design procedures.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Carry out advanced structural analysis.
2. Fully understand the requirements of structural design and the principles/procedures for the design of simple structural elements and understand the underlying scientific principles
3. Understand and apply the appropriate codes of practice and industry standards/published technical literature for designing structural elements

Indicative Content
1. Structural analysis: Compression members: modes of failure, slenderness and instability, Euler’s buckling load i.e. timber columns Basic concepts: Statically determinate vs statically indeterminate structures i.e. flexibility and stiffness methods Influence lines Symmetry
2. Structural design: Requirements of structural design, design philosophies Design requirements, loads and material strengths, partial safety factors, design process Introduction to timber column design Introduction to masonry Introduction temporary works
3. Laboratory Work: Timber beams tested to destruction and Buckling of [model] Struts

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Computer Arts course.

Module 1: DES207 Media Production - 40 SCQF (20 ECTS)

Module 2: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Computer Arts course. Please be aware that this is the only option available.

Module: DES315 Professional Project - 60 SCQF (30 ECTS)

DES207 Description

Brief Description

In this module, students will work collaboratively with their peers, as part of a multidisciplinary team, to design and develop an interactive media-based project that makes use of design elements. Individual students will be expected to; make use of relevant development and creative skills to generate elements of a media project; participate in pitching and presentations; hone their communication skills to work effectively within the team setting and present their work clearly; research and test technical pipelines; create project documentation and planning materials; and work, as part of a collective, towards a final interactive piece. Through engaging with this module you will develop Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular: * Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied. * Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions. * Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers. * Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required. * Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising. * Be responsive and responsible in personal, cultural and social contexts. * Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives. * Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. * Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts. * Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online. * Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with exposure to the processes, pipelines and challenges involved in team-based design and development of interactive entertainment.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Work as part of a team and undertake a specific role in the production of an interactive prototype.
2. Iteratively produce assets and documentation in support of an entertainment product
3. Reflect upon and present the challenges and issues in collaborative media development

Indicative Content
1. Contextual Overview: How games have been designed, prominent genres, styles and techniques.
2. Concept and Communication: Conceptualising and communicating ideas, scoping requirements, giving and receiving critique.
3. Design Process: Establishing a process, proposing solutions, iteration and documentation.
4. Core Design: Working up the concept, graphics, features, setting, story, objectives, levels.
5. The development team: Roles and responsibilities, scheduling and milestones, inclusive and supportive working.
6. Rules and Mechanics: Implementing choices, interactivity, strategies, motivation and reward, balancing gameplay.
7. Look and Feel: Establishing a style, ambience, colour and mood, sound effects, and music.
8. Cultural and Commercial Awareness: Designing for an audience, markets, genres and platforms.
9. Production: Using production processes to manage scope, communicate with team members, and deliver a project.
10. Publishing and Showcasing: Exploring opportunities in publishing games, developing pitch and advertising materials, and strategies for promoting your work.

DES315 Description

For this module, students will be required to work together on an interactive media project as part of a multidisciplinary team. Individual students will be expected to contribute to their team by taking on a professional role suited to their area of study. As part of the module, all students will be expected to: communicate with clients and relevant stakeholders; participate in pitching and presentations; research and test technical pipelines; create project documentation and planning materials; and contribute to the iterative design and development of a final interactive prototype.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to operate professionally as a subject specialist within a multidisciplinary development team, contributing to planning, presenting, prototyping, and production.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate evidence of professional competence as a practitioner in their chosen discipline
2. Demonstrate an ability to integrate their own contributions with those of team members from a range of disciplines to deliver a cohesive and functional prototype, constituting a vertical slice of gameplay or interactive experience across the full pre-production lifecycle of an interactive media project including ideation, iterative development, testing, enhancement, completion, and delivery. 
3. Demonstrate teamwork, appropriate communication skills, and the ability to interact with all stakeholders in a professional, respectful and productive manner throughout the production and delivery of a team project

Indicative Content
1. Team Organisation and Management - Attend and participate in team meetings, keep meeting minutes, and assign roles and responsibilities; Identify and overcome team problems, understand conflicts and approaches to conflict resolution, and engage with team building.
2. Communication and Professionalism - Demonstrate the ability to communicate within the team, with tutors, with clients/mentors, and with other stakeholders in a professional and respectful manner.
3. Development Methodologies - Understand and apply appropriate development methodologies framed by the requirements of a project and balance of a team, e.g. agile, scrum, lean, spiral, feature-driven, waterfall/traditional.
4. Research and Concept Development - Research similar products and competitors; Research and interpret the product marketplace, considering platform, user profiles, costs, regional differences etc; Conduct visual and audio research; Iteratively develop design concepts in response to a given brief.
5. Technologies and Pipelines - Research software and hardware technologies; Develop a technical plan for game development; Research, develop, test and document production pipelines.
6. Style and Branding - Develop a brand for the team and the project; Research, develop, document, and communicate a defined visual and audio style; Produce marketing and promotional materials.
7. Pitching and Presentation - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
8. Prototype Development, Testing, and Iteration - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
9. Release Management - Manage the software development process using source control, defect tracking, and build processes.
10. Project Delivery - Consider the methods for delivering products to the market, including market cycles, digital distribution, and the publisher-developer relationship; Deliver a complete prototype with accompanying press kit.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Computer Game Applications Development course.

Module 1: CMP202 Data Structures and Algorithms 2

Module 2: CMP208 Game Programming and System Architectures

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MuSuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Computer Game Applications Development course. Please be aware that this is the only option available.

Module: DES315 Professional Project - 60 SCQF (30 ECTS)

CMP202 Description

This module builds on Data Structures and Algorithms 1 by introducing students to some of the practical performance concerns in the selection and implementation of parallel algorithms, using a range of case studies drawn from typical real-world applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To develop computational and algorithmic thinking and show how data structures and algorithms are used efficiently in real-world applications.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Be aware of the standard techniques of software performance measurement, including profiling, and apply these techniques to identify performance bottlenecks in real programs.
2. Understand the emerging importance of parallel programming in modern software development, and experiment with the performance impact of parallelising parts of an application.
3. Describe a variety of application-specific algorithms (sorting/numerical/image processing) and associated data structures in common use, and discuss the benefits and limitations of parallelisation.

Indicative Content
1. Measuring performance
Basic techniques, sources of error [round off, range, instability, discretisation], profiling, analysing and presenting results
2. Parallel programming
Why to parallelise, Amdahl's law, high-level approaches to parallelisation, parallel design
3. Low-level programming with threads
Starting and joining threads, sharing data safely, mutual exclusion, synchronisation objects, lock-free
4. High-level parallel programming
Task-based parallelism, data-parallel problems, exploiting locality
5. Instruction-level parallelism
SIMD instructions, automatic vectorisation
6. GPGPU
GPU architectures, appropriate algorithms for GPUs, GPU profiling
7. Application case studies
Awareness of common sorting, numerical, image processing and searching and optimization algorithms (and associated data structures) and a recognition as to which are relevant for chosen field of study e.g. Spatial trees, pathfinding and AI, database indexing, password hashing, simulation, file carving] and which can benefit from parallelisation.

CMP208 Description

This module builds on Graphics Programming, Data Structures and Algorithms 1 and Computer Architecture and introduces the necessary components needed to develop a 3D physics-based game application considering the hardware.

Aims
To enable students to integrate various components (3D graphics, physics, audio) and to develop a 3D game application that makes effective use of modern computer/console systems

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe 3D graphics, audio and physics functionality within a 3D games application .
2. Implement key game components - 3D graphics, audio, gameplay and physics on games console hardware.
3. Design, implement and evaluate applications that demonstrate enhanced performance in relation to device hardware e.g. multithreading

Indicative Content
1. Games Hardware (Introduction to Consoles)
Device Memory and CPU/GPU architecture characteristics - Cache architectures, locality, alignment, virtual memory, memory allocation techniques, CPU/GPU architecture: Pipelines, superscalar architectures, branch prediction, out-of-order execution, hyperthreading, multicore, NUMA
2. User Interfaces
Methods to exploit touchscreen and controller pads user inputs.
3. Audio Engines
3D positional audio – considering the position, orientation and velocity of the listener and the position, orientation and velocity of the emitter.
4. Physics Engines
Collision detection, Rigid Body Dynamics using Box2D
5. Character Animation
Types of character animation and techniques of character animation
6. Putting it all together – How – where to parallelise recognising console architecture
7. Multithreading
Cross referencing Memory architecture and CPU architecture

DES315 Description

For this module, students will be required to work together on an interactive media project as part of a multidisciplinary team. Individual students will be expected to contribute to their team by taking on a professional role suited to their area of study. As part of the module, all students will be expected to: communicate with clients and relevant stakeholders; participate in pitching and presentations; research and test technical pipelines; create project documentation and planning materials; and contribute to the iterative design and development of a final interactive prototype.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to operate professionally as a subject specialist within a multidisciplinary development team, contributing to planning, presenting, prototyping, and production.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate evidence of professional competence as a practitioner in their chosen discipline
2. Demonstrate an ability to integrate their own contributions with those of team members from a range of disciplines to deliver a cohesive and functional prototype, constituting a vertical slice of gameplay or interactive experience across the full pre-production lifecycle of an interactive media project including ideation, iterative development, testing, enhancement, completion, and delivery. 
3. Demonstrate teamwork, appropriate communication skills, and the ability to interact with all stakeholders in a professional, respectful and productive manner throughout the production and delivery of a team project

Indicative Content
1. Team Organisation and Management - Attend and participate in team meetings, keep meeting minutes, and assign roles and responsibilities; Identify and overcome team problems, understand conflicts and approaches to conflict resolution, and engage with team building.
2. Communication and Professionalism - Demonstrate the ability to communicate within the team, with tutors, with clients/mentors, and with other stakeholders in a professional and respectful manner.
3. Development Methodologies - Understand and apply appropriate development methodologies framed by the requirements of a project and balance of a team, e.g. agile, scrum, lean, spiral, feature-driven, waterfall/traditional.
4. Research and Concept Development - Research similar products and competitors; Research and interpret the product marketplace, considering platform, user profiles, costs, regional differences etc; Conduct visual and audio research; Iteratively develop design concepts in response to a given brief.
5. Technologies and Pipelines - Research software and hardware technologies; Develop a technical plan for game development; Research, develop, test and document production pipelines.
6. Style and Branding - Develop a brand for the team and the project; Research, develop, document, and communicate a defined visual and audio style; Produce marketing and promotional materials.
7. Pitching and Presentation - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
8. Prototype Development, Testing, and Iteration - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
9. Release Management - Manage the software development process using source control, defect tracking, and build processes.
10. Project Delivery - Consider the methods for delivering products to the market, including market cycles, digital distribution, and the publisher-developer relationship; Deliver a complete prototype with accompanying press kit.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Computer Games Technology course.

Module 1: CMP202 Data Structures and Algorithms 2

Module 2: CMP208 Game Programming and System Architectures

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Computer Games Technology course. Please be aware that this is the only option available.

Module: DES315 Professional Project - 60 SCQF (30 ECTS)

CMP202 Description

This module builds on Data Structures and Algorithms 1 by introducing students to some of the practical performance concerns in the selection and implementation of parallel algorithms, using a range of case studies drawn from typical real-world applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To develop computational and algorithmic thinking and show how data structures and algorithms are used efficiently in real-world applications.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Be aware of the standard techniques of software performance measurement, including profiling, and apply these techniques to identify performance bottlenecks in real programs.
2. Understand the emerging importance of parallel programming in modern software development, and experiment with the performance impact of parallelising parts of an application.
3. Describe a variety of application-specific algorithms (sorting/numerical/image processing) and associated data structures in common use, and discuss the benefits and limitations of parallelisation.

Indicative Content
1. Measuring performance
Basic techniques, sources of error [round off, range, instability, discretisation], profiling, analysing and presenting results
2. Parallel programming
Why to parallelise, Amdahl's law, high-level approaches to parallelisation, parallel design
3. Low-level programming with threads
Starting and joining threads, sharing data safely, mutual exclusion, synchronisation objects, lock-free
4. High-level parallel programming
Task-based parallelism, data-parallel problems, exploiting locality
5. Instruction-level parallelism
SIMD instructions, automatic vectorisation
6. GPGPU
GPU architectures, appropriate algorithms for GPUs, GPU profiling
7. Application case studies
Awareness of common sorting, numerical, image processing and searching and optimization algorithms (and associated data structures) and a recognition as to which are relevant for chosen field of study e.g. Spatial trees, pathfinding and AI, database indexing, password hashing, simulation, file carving] and which can benefit from parallelisation.

CMP208 Description

This module builds on Graphics Programming, Data Structures and Algorithms 1 and Computer Architecture and introduces the necessary components needed to develop a 3D physics-based game application considering the hardware.

Aims
To enable students to integrate various components (3D graphics, physics, audio) and to develop a 3D game application that makes effective use of modern computer/console systems

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe 3D graphics, audio and physics functionality within a 3D games application .
2. Implement key game components - 3D graphics, audio, gameplay and physics on games console hardware.
3. Design, implement and evaluate applications that demonstrate enhanced performance in relation to device hardware e.g. multithreading

Indicative Content
1. Games Hardware (Introduction to Consoles)
Device Memory and CPU/GPU architecture characteristics - Cache architectures, locality, alignment, virtual memory, memory allocation techniques, CPU/GPU architecture: Pipelines, superscalar architectures, branch prediction, out-of-order execution, hyperthreading, multicore, NUMA
2. User Interfaces
Methods to exploit touchscreen and controller pads user inputs.
3. Audio Engines
3D positional audio – considering the position, orientation and velocity of the listener and the position, orientation and velocity of the emitter.
4. Physics Engines
Collision detection, Rigid Body Dynamics using Box2D
5. Character Animation
Types of character animation and techniques of character animation
6. Putting it all together – How – where to parallelise recognising console architecture
7. Multithreading
Cross referencing Memory architecture and CPU architecture

DES315 Description

For this module, students will be required to work together on an interactive media project as part of a multidisciplinary team. Individual students will be expected to contribute to their team by taking on a professional role suited to their area of study. As part of the module, all students will be expected to: communicate with clients and relevant stakeholders; participate in pitching and presentations; research and test technical pipelines; create project documentation and planning materials; and contribute to the iterative design and development of a final interactive prototype.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to operate professionally as a subject specialist within a multidisciplinary development team, contributing to planning, presenting, prototyping, and production.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate evidence of professional competence as a practitioner in their chosen discipline
2. Demonstrate an ability to integrate their own contributions with those of team members from a range of disciplines to deliver a cohesive and functional prototype, constituting a vertical slice of gameplay or interactive experience across the full pre-production lifecycle of an interactive media project including ideation, iterative development, testing, enhancement, completion, and delivery. 
3. Demonstrate teamwork, appropriate communication skills, and the ability to interact with all stakeholders in a professional, respectful and productive manner throughout the production and delivery of a team project

Indicative Content
1. Team Organisation and Management - Attend and participate in team meetings, keep meeting minutes, and assign roles and responsibilities; Identify and overcome team problems, understand conflicts and approaches to conflict resolution, and engage with team building.
2. Communication and Professionalism - Demonstrate the ability to communicate within the team, with tutors, with clients/mentors, and with other stakeholders in a professional and respectful manner.
3. Development Methodologies - Understand and apply appropriate development methodologies framed by the requirements of a project and balance of a team, e.g. agile, scrum, lean, spiral, feature-driven, waterfall/traditional.
4. Research and Concept Development - Research similar products and competitors; Research and interpret the product marketplace, considering platform, user profiles, costs, regional differences etc; Conduct visual and audio research; Iteratively develop design concepts in response to a given brief.
5. Technologies and Pipelines - Research software and hardware technologies; Develop a technical plan for game development; Research, develop, test and document production pipelines.
6. Style and Branding - Develop a brand for the team and the project; Research, develop, document, and communicate a defined visual and audio style; Produce marketing and promotional materials.
7. Pitching and Presentation - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
8. Prototype Development, Testing, and Iteration - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
9. Release Management - Manage the software development process using source control, defect tracking, and build processes.
10. Project Delivery - Consider the methods for delivering products to the market, including market cycles, digital distribution, and the publisher-developer relationship; Deliver a complete prototype with accompanying press kit.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Computing course.

Module 1: CMP202 Data Structures and Algorithms 2

Module 2: CMP206 Programming For The User

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Computing course.

Module 1: CMP309 Software Development for Mobile Devices

Module 2: CMP310 Fundamentals of Machine Learning 

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

CMP202 Description

This module builds on Data Structures and Algorithms 1 by introducing students to some of the practical performance concerns in the selection and implementation of parallel algorithms, using a range of case studies drawn from typical real-world applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To develop computational and algorithmic thinking and show how data structures and algorithms are used efficiently in real-world applications.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Be aware of the standard techniques of software performance measurement, including profiling, and apply these techniques to identify performance bottlenecks in real programs.
2. Understand the emerging importance of parallel programming in modern software development, and experiment with the performance impact of parallelising parts of an application.
3. Describe a variety of application-specific algorithms (sorting/numerical/image processing) and associated data structures in common use, and discuss the benefits and limitations of parallelisation.

Indicative Content
1. Measuring performance
Basic techniques, sources of error [round off, range, instability, discretisation], profiling, analysing and presenting results
2. Parallel programming
Why to parallelise, Amdahl's law, high-level approaches to parallelisation, parallel design
3. Low-level programming with threads
Starting and joining threads, sharing data safely, mutual exclusion, synchronisation objects, lock-free
4. High-level parallel programming
Task-based parallelism, data-parallel problems, exploiting locality
5. Instruction-level parallelism
SIMD instructions, automatic vectorisation
6. GPGPU
GPU architectures, appropriate algorithms for GPUs, GPU profiling
7. Application case studies
Awareness of common sorting, numerical, image processing and searching and optimization algorithms (and associated data structures) and a recognition as to which are relevant for chosen field of study e.g. Spatial trees, pathfinding and AI, database indexing, password hashing, simulation, file carving] and which can benefit from parallelisation.

CMP206 Description

This module will introduce students to generic concepts for the optimization of interactions between a user and computing systems and service, and how these interactions can be evaluated. Students will learn about research methods, quantitative and qualitative data analysis, and ethics in the data gathering process, as well as interface design. Aspects of usability and accessibility will be explored.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the opportunity to evaluate and design interfaces under consideration of usability and accessibility of the interface.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically appraise user interface design for desktop, web and mobile platforms
2. Perform simple experiments and analyses to evidence understanding of research within the computing area
3. Design an interface under consideration of usability and accessibility issues in computing

Indicative Content
1. Designing Experiments
Creating and building small experiments that relate to aspects of computing
2. Usability and Accessibility
Developing interfaces that are usable and accessible under consideration of platform
3. Professional and Ethical Issues
Consideration of issues that affect professionalism and ethical procedures in computing industries
4. Data Analysis and Evaluation
Quantitative and qualitative data analysis methods

CMP309 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of software development practices which can be used to develop applications for a range of mobile devices. Students will develop and evaluate the techniques used to implement mobile applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the ability to design, develop and critically evaluate software for the mobile platform.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Design and implement mobile software incorporating appropriate UI design for multi-device applications using native frameworks and libraries;
2. Discuss the devices, designs and languages relevant to smart and mobile operating systems;
3. Use network programming constructs including sockets and protocols to include security, location and privacy functionality in mobile applications;
4. Critically appraise usability and accessibility in mobile applications, identifying and exemplifying good practice.

Indicative Content
1. Background to Smart and Mobile Development:
Challenges and limitations in developing for mobile devices. Development strategies, emulators and development environments. Use of the application abstraction to allow easier development.
2. User Interfaces:
Development of interfaces for user-interaction including UI controls (buttons, forms) and underlying hardware controls (key presses, touch screen). Basic control of a mobile device using the high-level user interface. Use of commands and forms to gain data from the client. Use of low-level features to display data to the user. Use of key presses to control real-time application.
3. Storage:
Consideration of storage requirements for mobile devices. Saving and retrieving local and remote storage. Overview of database design. Use of remote databases, and how to use server-side databases in an internet application. Use of internet-based scripting to generate server-side text for the client.
4. Location awareness
Utilising the network location capabilities of mobile devices to develop feature rich applications.
5. Telephony SMS
Understanding the telephony and SMS stack on the mobile device and the use of API’s required for their access and control.
6. Communication Networks
Using short and long-distance networks for communication and understanding of the limitations and benefits of each.
7. Security
Consider the security implications of mobile and smart platforms, how these can be exploited and development considerations to improve resilience.
8. Performance
Methods for testing the functionality and performance of applications on mobile devices.
9. Mobile Web Application Development
Explore and evaluate a range of mobile solution options from response design, Firebase-, and JavaScript-based applications.

CMP310 Description

Brief Description

This module develops students’ understanding of how Machine Learning (ML) fits in Artificial Intelligence (AI) contexts. It observes how ML solutions became a vital component in the development of intelligent systems and how they can be utilised in certain types of problems within a wide spectrum of disciplines. The module introduces some of the many ML systems and relevant data concepts. Students are encouraged to select one technique to use in a given domain-specific application.

Aims

The module aims to provide students with a basic understanding of ML theory and the practical ability to effectively implement and use such methods in the development of intelligent solutions, as well as critically evaluating said solution.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand the different learning paradigms and their applicability and challenges.
2. Identify the use of various intelligent algorithms in real-world environments.
3. Design and justify a suitable ML solution for a data-driven problem in a given context.
4. Analyse and critically evaluate ML technologies and techniques for specific purposes.

Indicative Content
1. Learning Pipeline: Conceptual view of the fundamentals and terminology of ML, and the ability of a machine to learn from its environment. The structure and components of the traditional machine learning pipeline: data, model, and evaluation.
2. Challenges of Applied ML: The difficulties that arise with data-driven problems and the challenges accompanying a ML solution. Practical issues around data availability and representation, as well as characteristics of the applied model. The causes of overfitting and underfitting and possible remedies.
3. Learning Paradigms: The main approaches to learning and how a system can be supervised, unsupervised, or reinforced to produce a solution. The practicality of each paradigm and the constraints of its applicability.
4. ML Techniques: Linear Regression, Reinforcement Learning, Artificial Neural Networks, Clustering Algorithms, Feature Identification with Singular Value Decomposition, Support Vector Machine, Random Forests, Decision Trees, Convolution Neural Network.
5. Data for ML: The importance of data cleaning and pre-processing in ML context. Data representation. The curse of dimensionality. Feature selection and the impact of weak descriptors. Examples of datasets from different domains. Dimensionality reduction and Principal Component Analysis.
6. Applications of ML: Real-world data-driven problems. Applications and uses of ML solutions. Analysis and discussion of case studies in different contexts.
7. Evaluation Metrics: Analysis tools to assess the performance of a model. Understanding different metrics, what they describe the model, and their suitability in practice. Fitness function, Cost functions, False positive Rate, Receiver Operating Characteristics, Confusion Matrix. The Precision-Recall trade-off.
8. Model Enhancement: Addressing poor performance and situations where data availability may not be enough. Methods to improve performance, assist convergence, and speed up parameter optimisation. Regularisation, Gradient Descent, Cross-validation.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Criminology course.

Module 1: CRM208 Criminalisation in the 21st Century

Module 2: SOC220 Social Research in Action 2

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Criminology course.

Module 1: SOC303 Race, Ethnicity and Immigration

Module 2: CRM301 Gender and Crime

Module 3: CRM306 Drugs, Addiction and Society

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for one of our elective modules

SOC220 Description

An introduction to qualitative and quantitative research methods for the social sciences.

Aims

The aim of this module is to introduce students to the principles and practice of qualitative and quantitative research in the social sciences. It will provide students with the knowledge and skills to identify and use appropriate qualitative data collection tools and apply basic thematic analysis techniques to qualitative data. It will also equip students with an understanding of basic statistical principles and how to apply these to describe and analyse quantitative datasets relevant to social scientific research.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand how to apply a number of important qualitative data collection methods.
2. Develop an interpretative framework appropriate to the analysis of data generated through qualitative data collection methods.
3. Understand key statistical principles and techniques that underpin quantitative social science research.
4. Apply appropriate statistical techniques to an existing quantitative dataset and interpret the results to draw robust social scientific findings.

Indicative Content
1. Qualitative data collection: The first part of the module will involve both a theoretical and ‘hands on’ introduction to a number of important qualitative data-collection methods such as semi-structured interviews, focus groups and participant observation. Students will learn how such techniques are applicable to different research contexts and scenarios, and how they should reflect upon themselves as active, ethical participants in conducting qualitative research.
2. Qualitative data analysis: The first part of the module also provides opportunities for students to engage in the analysis of data produced using qualitative data collection techniques. The main emphasis here will be on thematic analysis and how qualitative researchers use this to produce social scientific knowledge about social phenomena. This part of the module will also familiarize students with the use of NVivo computer software for qualitative data analysis.
3. Principles of statistics: The second part of the module will involve an introduction to key principles of statistics. Students will learn about the role that these play in underpinning different techniques for the description and interpretation of quantitative social scientific data.
4. Quantitative data analysis: The second part of the module also provides opportunities for students to engage with existing datasets and to gain ‘hands on’ experience in using SPSS software to organize, describe and make robust inferences from that data.

CRM208 Description

Brief Description

This module will look at ways of interpreting new laws, forms of policing and at new forms of criminalisation.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the opportunity to understand theories of risk and regulation that attempt to explain how and why certain issues are problematised and made criminal.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify key themes and ideas in the history of crime control and explain theories of fear and risk.
2. Explain theories regarding crime panics and identify theories exploring the ‘new elites’ and their growing regulation of everyday life.
3. Explain how the theory of diminished subjectivity relates to new forms of criminalisation including the criminalisation and ‘policing’ of young people, relationships and language.

Indicative Content
1. Criminalisation: The criminalisation of everything; the development of new laws, forms of surveillance and ways of thinking about crime.
2. Race and class: Moral and amoral panics, past and present, regarding class and race.
3. Tolerance, intolerance and zero tolerance: Changing nature of the elite, of the legal subject and the new criminalising dynamic.
4. Fear, risk and regulation: The importance of policing fear and developing a culture of control.
5. The rise and fall of ‘youth’: Freedom and rebellion; regulation and safety of generation ‘Snowflake’.

SOC303 Description

Brief Description

This module will examine the history of race and racism in 19th, 20th and 21st century Britain, from the 'Scramble for Africa' through the postwar/post-colonial period to the present. It will examine the various forces, processes and discourses through which race, ethnicity and the racialised subject have been constructed, shaped and changed. It will also examine theoretical approaches to and debates about race and ethnicity, racism, race relations and anti-racism, and how these have developed in response to both historical developments and social-political activism.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide students with: a critically informed understanding of the history of race and racism in Britain; theories of race, ethnicity, racism and prejudice; and the relationship between theories and concepts of race and ethnicity, power, history and activism.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand and critically engage with the history of race, racism and immigration in 20th century Britain.
2. Understand and critically engage with the history and development of the concepts of race and ethnicity.
3. Understand and critically engage with the relationship between the theorisation and conceptualisation of race and ethnicity, racism and antiracism, power, history and activism.
4. Have knowledge of and critically engage with the diverse sociological (and wider) theories of race, ethnicity, racism and prejudice.
5. Understand and critically engage with theories and concepts of race, racism, ethnicity, colonialism, imperialism, nationalism, power, inequality, prejudice, difference, representation & identity.
6. Work in both an individual and group setting, and develop critical, collaborative, written and oral presentation skills.

Indicative Content
1. The Concept and Construction of Race and Ethnicity: This section will look at the concept and construction of race and ethnicity, and the production of racial knowledge from the colonial period to the present.
2. Race, Ethnicity and Nation: This section will examine the (re)construction and relationship between race, ethnicity and nation in Britain in light of postwar/ post-colonial immigration and the end of empire.
3. Race, Ethnicity and Identity: This section will examine the the politics, construction and expression of racial and ethnic identities in post-colonial Britain in response to colonialism, migration, discrimination and racism.
4. Race and Class: This section will examine the relationship between race and class as sites of social-political identification, power, inequality, political struggle and analysis, as well as debates over which is the most effective framework for analysis and activism.
5. Race and Gender: This section will examine the relationship between race and gender as sites of social-political identification, power, inequality, political struggle and analysis, as well as debates over which is the most effective framework for analysis and activism.
6. Race, Crime, Civil Unrest and Political Protest: This section will examine the relationship (within analysis and representation) between race, the law, crime, civil unrest and political protest against socioeconomic conditions, policing and state policy.
7. Anti-Racism, Race Relations and Multiculturalism: This section will examine the history and development of anti-racist and race relations discourses, activism, strategies and legislation, how they have attempted to combat forms of racism, discrimination and inequality, and debates surrounding them.
8. Race, Ethnicity and the Politics of Popular Culture: This section will examine popular culture (e.g. music, film or television) in terms of postcolonial cultural politics, multiculturalism, representation, identity and political activism.

CRM301 Description

This module will examine the relationship between gender and crime.

Aims

To explore the ways in which crime is gendered.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate an understanding of the feminist critique of criminology.
2. Understand the relationship between the construction of masculinity and femininity and crime.
3. Explore the relationship between crime and 'doing gender'.

Indicative Content
1. The Feminist Critique of Criminology: The emergence of the feminist critique and the challenge to the feminine 'other'.
2. Women and Crime: The pattern of women's crime. Deviance, femininity and the response to female transgression.
3. Men and Crime: Masculinity and crime, crime as structured action, crime as a resource for doing gender. The situational context and crime.

CRM303 Description

Using a perspective that sees technologies as socially constructed this module introduces students to the study of surveillance and cybercrime. It offers an analysis of the ways in which surveillance, cybercrime and cybersecurity can be seen as socio- technical assemblages.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: a critical understanding of surveillance and cybercrime in the contemporary world and their effect on the lives of individuals and groups. The module uses a perspective that sees technologies as socially constructed. With this perspective and relevant case studies presented in lectures and readings, students will be encouraged to reflexively challenge the boundaries of technology and society, applying confident and creative thinking to academic and industry debates.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate knowledge of the social construction of technologies.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of the ways in which surveillance concepts are tied with surveillance technologies.
3. Critically explore and understand how the internet and digital technologies change how we conceptualise crime and security.
4. Critically understand the interdisciplinary nature of the phenomena of cybercrime and surveillance.

Indicative Content
1. Concepts on the Social Study of Technology
such as (a) Social Construction of Technology (b) Technological Determinism (c) Actor-Network Theory.
2. Case Studies in Surveillance
such as (a) Automation of surveillance (b) Algorithmic Surveillance (c) Dataveillance.
3. Case Studies in Cybercrime and Security
such as: (a) malware software (b) security policies and mechanisms (c) Encryption (d) the Dark Web (e) manipulation of trust and reputation.

CRM306 Description

Brief Description

Social scientific perspectives on the problem of drugs and addiction within contemporary societies.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide students with a wide-ranging and critical social scientific understanding of: the problem of drugs and controlled substances; the issue of drug addiction and dependence; and the contexts and consequences of state, professional and/or other interventions with respect to addiction and problematic drug use.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate the social and historical determinants of the drugs ‘problem’ across a number of fields of practice.
2. Appraise the contribution of a number of social scientific perspectives relevant to the understanding of drug addiction.
3. Assess, from a critical social scientific perspective, the contribution of one or more contemporary approaches deployed in the management of problem drug use and/or addiction.

Indicative Content
1. Distribution and consumption: Historical perspectives on problematic consumption; UK drug policy; political and cultural economies of drug distribution; the ‘normalization thesis’; practices of ‘recreational’ or ‘problematic’ consumption.
2. Dependence and addiction: Rational choice perspectives; neuroscientific approaches; the social construction of addiction; addiction as a social practice.
3. Governance and intervention: Criminal justice enforcement and policing; harm reduction/risk minimization strategies; methadone maintenance; talking therapies and recovery.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Ethical Hacking course.

Module 1: CMP202 Data Structures and Algorithms 2

Module 2: CMP209 Digital Forensics 1

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Ethical Hacking course.

Module 1: CMP309 Software Development for Mobile Devices

Module 2: CMP320 Advanced Ethical Hacking

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

CMP202 Description

This module builds on Data Structures and Algorithms 1 by introducing students to some of the practical performance concerns in the selection and implementation of parallel algorithms, using a range of case studies drawn from typical real-world applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : To develop computational and algorithmic thinking and show how data structures and algorithms are used efficiently in real-world applications.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Be aware of the standard techniques of software performance measurement, including profiling, and apply these techniques to identify performance bottlenecks in real programs.
2. Understand the emerging importance of parallel programming in modern software development, and experiment with the performance impact of parallelising parts of an application.
3. Describe a variety of application-specific algorithms (sorting/numerical/image processing) and associated data structures in common use, and discuss the benefits and limitations of parallelisation.

Indicative Content
1. Measuring performance
Basic techniques, sources of error [round off, range, instability, discretisation], profiling, analysing and presenting results
2. Parallel programming
Why to parallelise, Amdahl's law, high-level approaches to parallelisation, parallel design
3. Low-level programming with threads
Starting and joining threads, sharing data safely, mutual exclusion, synchronisation objects, lock-free
4. High-level parallel programming
Task-based parallelism, data-parallel problems, exploiting locality
5. Instruction-level parallelism
SIMD instructions, automatic vectorisation
6. GPGPU
GPU architectures, appropriate algorithms for GPUs, GPU profiling
7. Application case studies
Awareness of common sorting, numerical, image processing and searching and optimization algorithms (and associated data structures) and a recognition as to which are relevant for chosen field of study e.g. Spatial trees, pathfinding and AI, database indexing, password hashing, simulation, file carving] and which can benefit from parallelisation.

CMP209 Description

This module examines the basic technology and techniques used to investigate cybercrime. A systematic approach to planning and implementing a comprehensive computer forensic investigation is introduced with a particular focus on evidence collection and the reconstruction of events therefrom.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to carry out computer forensic investigations and appraise forensic software with a view to develop appropriate investigation strategies in the light of emerging digital technologies.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand the principles of computer forensic investigation with regard to the legal definitions of computer misuse.
2. Devise an appropriate professional level plan for a forensic investigation and carry out this plan within a context of a specific scenario.
3. Analyse and evaluate the results of a computer forensic investigation.

Indicative Content
1. Computer Crime
Types of computer crime; legislation concerning computer crime.
2. Use of Linux as an investigative environment
Familiarisation with the command-line interface
3. File Systems as a source of forensic evidence
Structure of NTFS, FAT, FAT32, and Linux file systems.
4. Data Acquisition
Procedures for acquiring disk images; collection of evidence from crime scenes, integrity of evidence, write blockers
5. Computer Forensics Tools
Command line tools; Linux tools; Windows tools.
6. Computer Forensic Analysis
Digital forensic toolkits; data hiding techniques; anti-forensics
7. Internet History and Email
Identifying email and browser-derived evidence; examining email headers; using specialist email forensic tools; examining browser histories and cookies.
8. Working with MS-Windows Systems
File system; investigation of the Registry; recovering deleted files; working with forensic boot disks.
9. Computer Forensics Analysis
Methodologies for forensic analysis of systems and the assessment of results. Memory forensics
10. Reporting Results of Investigations
Importance of reports; time-lines; designing the layout of a report.

CMP309 Description

This module develops a critical understanding of software development practices which can be used to develop applications for a range of mobile devices. Students will develop and evaluate the techniques used to implement mobile applications.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the ability to design, develop and critically evaluate software for the mobile platform.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Design and implement mobile software incorporating appropriate UI design for multi-device applications using native frameworks and libraries;
2. Discuss the devices, designs and languages relevant to smart and mobile operating systems;
3. Use network programming constructs including sockets and protocols to include security, location and privacy functionality in mobile applications;
4. Critically appraise usability and accessibility in mobile applications, identifying and exemplifying good practice.

Indicative Content
1. Background to Smart and Mobile Development:
Challenges and limitations in developing for mobile devices. Development strategies, emulators and development environments. Use of the application abstraction to allow easier development.
2. User Interfaces:
Development of interfaces for user-interaction including UI controls (buttons, forms) and underlying hardware controls (key presses, touch screen). Basic control of a mobile device using the high-level user interface. Use of commands and forms to gain data from the client. Use of low-level features to display data to the user. Use of key presses to control real-time application.
3. Storage:
Consideration of storage requirements for mobile devices. Saving and retrieving local and remote storage. Overview of database design. Use of remote databases, and how to use server-side databases in an internet application. Use of internet-based scripting to generate server-side text for the client.
4. Location awareness
Utilising the network location capabilities of mobile devices to develop feature rich applications.
5. Telephony SMS
Understanding the telephony and SMS stack on the mobile device and the use of API’s required for their access and control.
6. Communication Networks
Using short and long-distance networks for communication and understanding of the limitations and benefits of each.
7. Security
Consider the security implications of mobile and smart platforms, how these can be exploited and development considerations to improve resilience.
8. Performance
Methods for testing the functionality and performance of applications on mobile devices.
9. Mobile Web Application Development
Explore and evaluate a range of mobile solution options from response design, Firebase-, and JavaScript-based applications.

CMP320 Description

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the broad subject area of binary auditing. The student will also gain an understanding of the countermeasures that a company can take to minimise the effect of vulnerabilities.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Analyse and critically evaluate techniques used to exploit binary files and identify relevant countermeasures.
2. Examine a topic in binary auditing and report the findings.
3. Demonstrate a critical evaluation of an advanced security topic with an independent project.

Indicative Content
1. Binary auditing tools
Binary auditing tools. Debuggers, add-ons, debugging techniques.
2. Binary auditing
Binary auditing. Source code auditing, Black box auditing, Reverse engineering auditing, Copy protection auditing.
3. Buffer Overflows
Significance of Buffer Overflow Vulnerability, Why Programs and Applications are Vulnerable. Reasons for Buffer Overflow Attacks. Methods of ensuring that buffer overflows are trapped.
4. Shell code development
Shell code development. Creating and writing shellcode.
5. Structured Exception Handling
Structured Exception Handling (SEH) vulnerabilities. Exploitation and countermeasures.
6. Overcoming operating system countermeasures. Avoiding Data Execution Prevention (DEP). Address Space Randomisation Layout (ASLR) evasion using ROP chains.
7. Heap Spray Techniques
Heap Spray Techniques. Use of Heap Spraying to avoid countermeasures.
8. Malware analysis
Types of malware, malware analysis methodology. Static and Dynamic analysis.

CMP311 Description

This module involves completing a team based development project or other technical investigation project, which was planned and initially developed in CMP308 (Software Project Management). The nature of the project will be relevant to the programme studied by the student.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the opportunity to develop a product or technical solution by applying design, development and evaluation principles in a team environment; the ability to operate professionally as a subject specialist within a team and in interaction with project stakeholders.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Select and use appropriate project management techniques and tools to design, implement, test and evaluate a product
2. Contribute effectively to presentation and communication activities including demonstrating the developed product to stakeholders in a client pitch and project report
3. Work effectively within a team and critically appraise the individual contribution

Indicative Content
1. Orientation
Consolidation of project teams and target problem
2. Project principles
Required development methodologies during product production
3. Documentation
The importance and content of a requirements specification and related documentation
4. Design
The role of design and redesign during project development
5. Implementation
Implementation issues and approaches
6. Quality and Standards
Testing and evaluation methods and execution.
7. Communication
Oral and written communication and demonstration of software product
8. Project planning and team working
Planning the project, organising a team, supporting colleagues, devising weekly plans, keeping progress records
9. Self−evaluation
Personal contribution to team progress, logbook

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Fitness, Nutrition and Health course.

Module 1: FOD201 Public Health Nutrition and Health Promotion 1

Module 2: FOD204 Food Characterisation

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Fitness, Nutrition and Health course.

Module 1: SPS309 Physical Activity and Health Promotion

Module 2: SPS311 Physiology of Obesity and Non-communicable Diseases

Module 3: SPS312 Research Methods

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

FOD201 Description

This module covers the concepts of public health, development of public health policy and key public health issues. It will provide also the fundamentals of epidemiology.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : an understanding of public health and an appreciation of the relationship between health care politics, policy making and population health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Appraise Health Promotion models and interventions.
2. Discuss implementation of food and nutrition policy in a range of community settings.
3. Explain the main principles of epidemiology.

Indicative Content
1. Food & Nutrition policy
Framework of national and local policy and guidelines; models of good practice.
2. Health policy and public health
What is health policy? State intervention in health. Development of Green Papers/White Papers/Guidelines for health/Targets and implementation. Influences of global health policy. Structure of public health agencies.
3. Policy Implementation
Implementation of food and nutrition policy in educational establishments, community food initiatives, local authorities and health services.
4. Fundamentals of epidemiology
e.g. concept, measuring disease frequency, study designs for public health.

FOD204 Description

Brief Description

Analysis of food and drink is a very important part of product development and quality assurance encountered by food scientists and nutritionists in the work place. This module introduces the student to the techniques required to test food using analytical, physicochemical and sensory analysis techniques. Active engagement in the module will contribute to the development of Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular: * Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions. * Be able to critically and rigorously evaluate information, and tackle uncertainty and information gaps * Be leaders, decision-makers and problem-solvers, tackling complex issues using creativity and considered judgement * Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. * Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with: the necessary knowledge and skills to enable students to apply a range of analytical and sensory techniques to evaluate food and drink.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Apply a range of basic chemical, sensory, texture food analysis techniques used for the physicochemical characterisation of foods
2. Develop practical skills pertinent to chemical, sensory and textural analysis by executing appropriately designed experiments
3. Collect, analyse and interpret data using appropriate methodologies including statistical tests.
4. Develop laboratory keeping skills

Indicative Content

1. Physicochemical characterisation of foodspH and acidity using base titration) macro and micronutrient determination (vitamin C,& reducing sugar)
2. Sensory evaluation techniques (discrimination tests, ranking, descriptive and affective testing including accompanying statistics)Sensory evaluation techniques (discrimination tests, ranking, descriptive and affective testing including accompanying statistics)
3. Food hydrocolloids for modification of texture and evaluation of texture using the texture analyser
4. Data collection, analysis and interpretation including application of relevant statistical methodologies

SPS309 Description

This module introduces the student to health issues high on the policy agenda and the ways in which participation in physical activity can be and is promoted as a way of addressing these issues.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the students with an understanding of the complexities of health promotion and the potential for participation in physical activity to both alleviate and exacerbate contemporary health issues.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the concept of health and health promotion.
2. Critically discuss the importance of promoting physical activity in contemporary society.
3. Explain how health promotion interventions may often exacerbate existing health inequalities.
4. Appraise a physical activity intervention in relation to its potential impact on health inequalities.

Indicative Content
1. Defining Health
Students will understand the different ways in which health can and will be defined
2. Complexity of health promotion in contemporary Society
Students will explore the ways in which health promotion has the potential to both reduce and exacerbate existing social inequalities
3. Physical activity, its determinants and importance for health promotion
Students will develop a critical understanding of what factors influence physical activity and its fundamental role in health promotion
4. Critical Engagement with the Obesity ‘Epidemic’
Students will develop a critical understanding of why obesity is prioritised on the health policy agenda
5. Health promotion, physical activity and the environment
Students will explore the environmental factors that influence the promotion of health and physical activity participation

SPS311 Description

This module will cover the aetiology, physiology and pathophysiology of obesity and the principal non-communicable diseases.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with knowledge of obesity and a selection of non-communicable diseases that affect the human body and how these conditions impact upon lifestyle and lifespan.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically discuss the major pathophysiological processes and underlying mechanisms of obesity and a range of non-communicable diseases such as type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular diseases and cancer.
2. Describe the symptoms, prevalence, morbidity, mortality, and risk factors associated with the examined conditions.
3. Identify and evaluate the importance of physical activity in the prevention and management of the human conditions covered.
4. Critically analyse and evaluate scientific research publications in the area.

Indicative Content
1. Pathophysiology of Obesity
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of obesity and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.
2. Pathophysiology of Type II Diabetes
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of Type II Diabetes and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.
3. Pathophysiology of Cardiovascular
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of Cardiovascular disease and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.
4. Pathophysiology of Cancer
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of cancer and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.

SPS312 Description

This module will develop students’ ideas about research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health, enabling them to better understand and appreciate published research and design their own research project.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to design and carry out a research project (in their final year of study).

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Identify, refine and rationalise a suitable and appropriate research question
2. Critique published literature in the field of sport, exercise, physical activity and/or health
3. Construct an appropriate and ethical research design
4. Obtain practical research skills in preparation for data collection and analysis

Indicative Content
1. The research process
Students will learn and engage in a research process by which they will come to understand the steps associated with planning and conducting a research process.
2. Formulating and refining research questions
Students will learn how research ideas are questions are generated and refined.
3. Research methodologies
Students will be exposed to various research methodologies (e.g., quantitative, qualitative and mixed−methods) in order to develop an appreciation of diverse approaches to research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health.
4. Ethical issues
Students will develop an awareness of the key ethical issues associated with research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health.
5. Practical skill development
Students will be given opportunities to develop their practical research skills in their chosen discipline area.

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Food and Consumer Science and Food, Nutrition and Health courses.

Module 1: FOD204 Food Characterisation

Module 2: FOD201 Public Health Nutrition and Health Promotion 1

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

FOD204 Description

Analysis of food and drink is a major activity for the industry and a very important part of product development and quality assurance. This module introduces the student to the techniques required to test food using analytical, physicochemical and sensory analysis techniques.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : the necessary knowledge and skills to enable students to apply a range of analytical and sensory techniques to evaluate food and drink.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Choose and apply a range of food analyses techniques used for the physicochemical characterisation of foods, identification of chemicals or contaminants in foods.
2. Design and implement appropriate sensory tests for a range of food products
3. Analyse and present data obtained during food analysis and draw appropriate conclusions

Indicative Content
1. Physicochemical characterisation of foods
pH and titratible acidity, salt analysis using flame photometry, water content and water activity, colorimetry, turbidity measurement, texture analysis using empirical instruments (bostwick consistometer, texture analyser)
2. Spectrophotometry, Chromatography and mass spectrometry
3. Sensory evaluation techniques (discrimination tests, ranking, descriptive and affective testing including accompanying statistics)
4. Method development for NPD, quality control and quality assurance

FOD201 Description

This module covers the concepts of public health, development of public health policy and key public health issues. It will provide also the fundamentals of epidemiology.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of public health and an appreciation of the relationship between health care politics, policy making and population health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Appraise Health Promotion models and interventions.
2. Discuss implementation of food and nutrition policy in a range of community settings.
3. Explain the main principles of epidemiology.

Indicative Content
1. Food & Nutrition policy
Framework of national and local policy and guidelines; models of good practice.
2. Health policy and public health
What is health policy? State intervention in health. Development of Green Papers/White Papers/Guidelines for health/Targets and implementation. Influences of global health policy. Structure of public health agencies.
3. Policy Implementation
Implementation of food and nutrition policy in educational establishments, community food initiatives, local authorities and health services.
4. Fundamentals of epidemiology
e.g. concept, measuring disease frequency, study designs for public health.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Forensic Sciences course.

Module 1: FOR212 Investigative Analytical Science

Module 2: LSC201 Molecular Biology and Genetics

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of BSc Forensic Sciences course.

Module 1: FOR304 Forensic Trace Evidence

Module 2: FOR310 Forensic Pharmacology and Toxicology

Module 3: FOR312 Scene Examination and Management

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

FOR212 Description

A module designed to teach basic analytical skills and the theory behind these techniques, and to relate them to forensic and biomedical applications

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of basic analytical techniques.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Select, describe and apply analytical methods
2. Apply, interpret and report statistical tests for data analysis
3. Carry out a range of specified analyses

Indicative Content
1. Quality
Sample custody and traceability. Data interpretation and reporting.
2. Sample Preparation
Sampling. Drying. Crushing. Weighing. Dissolution. Separation and concentration.
3. Spectroscopy
Electromagnetic radiation and the nature of light. Beer Lambert law. Theory of spectroscopy. Instrumentation. UV-visible, IR and AAS spectroscopy. Presumptive tests. Spectroscopic
4. Theory and Principles of Chromatography
Introduction to TLC.
5. Immunotechnology
Diagnostic and detection systems based on antibody-antigen interaction: RIA, ELISA, Agglutination, Precipitation reactions. Direct, Indirect and sandwich assays. Use of serological methods in diagnosis of infectious diseases and forensic applications such as body fluid identification

LSC201 Description

This module provides an introduction to both Medical and Forensic genetics and uses specific examples, to highlight the importance of DNA analyses, in both fields.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an in-depth understanding of the fundamental concepts in molecular biology and genetics, together with relevant skills.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Explain the architecture, expression of human genes which are important in determining health, disease and forensically useful phenotypes.
2. Discuss both clinical and forensic genetic variation in the context of human genomics.
3. Deploy molecular genetic laboratory and bioinformatic analytical techniques.

Indicative Content
1. Genes and gene expression
Structure of human genes. Control of gene expression, with an emphasis on variations in genes that cause both medical conditions and common, forensically useful human traits. Splicing and differential gene expression. Common human variations and Mutations, including point mutations, indels, repeat expansions, and chromosomal aberrations.
2. Human Genomics and bioinformatic analysis
Sequence architecture of the human genome. Chromosome structure. DNA sequencing methods: Focusing on the comparison of the dideoxy irreversible terminator method of Sanger, with the “next generation” reversible terminator method of Balasubramanian and Klenerman. Analysis of sequence data. Genetic variation: the human gene pool, population genetics including Hardy-Weinberg equilibria.
3. Genetic engineering and other analytical techniques
Basic cloning including restriction digestion, ligation and transfection. PCR, Gel and capillary electrophoresis and accurate sizing of DNA fragments.

FOR304 Description

This module examines the value and limitations of selected trace evidence types in criminal investigations and considers the main trace evidence materials of glass, paint and fibres from the initial case assessment and laboratory analysis through to evaluation and presentation of trace evidence in court.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide an enhanced understanding of the evidential value of common trace evidence materials in criminal investigations through the development of an understanding of material composition together with the adoption of appropriate analytical and statistical processes.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Predict & explain the composition of common trace evidence materials & understand the need for contamination avoidance & adoption of quality systems & processes within a trace evidence laboratory.
2. Appraise and characterise the main trace evidence types.
3. Appreciate traditional statistical techniques and typical difficulties and limitations encountered during trace evidence evaluation using both classical and Bayesian style approaches.
4. Research, implement and manage correctly a range of analytical procedures appropriate to trace evidence analysis. Interpret and present the findings of laboratory trace evidence examinations.

Indicative Content
1. General Concepts of Trace Evidence:
Scope, recognition, recovery, case assessment, analysis, interpretation and presentation. Importance of discriminatory analytical methods, use of controls, sampling, reference materials, contamination avoidance, quality processes in the trace evidence laboratory, traceability, databases, frequency of occurrence, classical and Bayesian style interpretation and evaluation of evidence.
2. Composition and Properties of Common Trace Evidence Materials:
Composition, properties & where appropriate general processes used in the manufacture & colouring of glass/paints/manmade & natural fibres. Appreciation of different analytical processes appropriate to trace evidence examinations & some of the quality issues surrounding lab trace evidence exams. The use of groupings & t tests in the statistical analysis of data together with the limitations of such approaches & the use of continuous Bayesian style statistics in the evaluation of trace evidence.
3. Characterisation of Common Trace Evidence Materials:
Laboratory characterisation of glass, paints and fibres, use of various microscopic techniques in the comparison/discrimination of different trace evidence materials. Introduction to evidence interpretation and reporting of trace evidence laboratory casework; quality control, quality assurance, proficiency testing.

FOR310 Description

This module is designed to promote a detailed appreciation of the effects of toxins and drugs on human systems and the approaches to their detection and quantification in accidental and deliberate poisonings. The syllabus will be based around mammalian toxicology with a predominant focus on human examples.

Aims
To provide the student with a detailed appreciation of the interactions between organism and toxicants, and their subsequent effects at molecular, cellular and higher levels of organisation.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the principles of human pharmacology and toxicology, and of the chemical, cellular and physiological factors that affect the toxicity of compounds.
2. Discuss the role of pharmacology and toxicology in forensic and environmental investigations, and the range of common drugs and toxicants encountered.
3. Relate the kinetic and dynamic properties of common drugs and toxicants to the forensic evaluation and clinical management of accidental or deliberate poisonings.
4. Critically appraise the range of techniques and approaches for sample collection/handling; screening and confirmatory tests; and assessment, interpretation and recording of toxicological data

Indicative Content
1. Mechanisms of drug action and pharmacodynamics.
This will include; receptor signalling; agonists antagonists. Drug− receptor binding and interaction. Examples will be drawn from central nervous system (CNS) receptors, adrenergic cholinergic receptors/neurotransmission.
2. Pharmacokinetics
Absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion (ADME). Routes of administration and the implications for drug/toxin effect, and the distribution/dispersion of drug/toxins, phase I II metabolism, biotransformation. – including bioactivation. Elimination/Excretion. Intrinsic and extrinsic factors affecting ADME (such as pharmacogenetics). Introduction to quantitative elimination/back−calculation. Case studies.
3. Poisoning Symptoms
Toxicity, Toxidromes and the Treatment of Poisoning.
4. Forensic investigations
History of Forensic Toxicology. Areas of Forensic Toxicology. Environmental Toxicology. Sample types: Advantages, Disadvantages; Sample handling. Screening and confirmatory tests. Post−mortem toxicology. Toxicological reports.
5. Topic case studies.
Case studies based on real clinical, environmental and forensic toxicological cases.

FOR312 Description

This module explores some of the advanced principles of and techniques used in Forensic Science as well as the roles of Forensic Scientists. This will include higher level forensic practical skills involved in the investigation, searching and examination of crime scenes, as well as the examination techniques utilised in the examination of some of the evidence types found at crime scenes

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with: the ability to evaluate, examine and understand the process, management and control of crime scenes, along with the techniques and methodology of crime scene investigation and examination. As well as develop a sound understanding of the value of selected chemical and physical techniques in criminal investigations

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Assess, manage safely and secure major incident and crime scenes
2. Apply techniques of crime scene examination recording and searching
3. Locate and collect effective samples of evidence
4. Assess and interpret crime scene evidence
5. Select appropriate techniques for evidence recording, packaging and labelling to preserve and protect evidence and maintain the chain of custody of evidence
6. Produce a Court Report to record and report findings from the evidence collected at a crime scene

Indicative Content
1. Approach to Crime Scene Investigation
Roles responsibilities and liabilities of crime scene investigation and management, along with protection of the scene and co- ordination from initial assessment to scene conclusion
2. Crime Scene Examination and Searching
Methodologies of effective searching, examination of points of entry, systematic approach, use of light sources and photography. Fingerprinting techniques (e.g dusting, ninhydrin and cyanoacrylates), fingerprint identification and classification, casting techniques for toolmarks and footwear marks, footwear enhancement, comparison and identification
3. Advanced Enhancement Techniques
Application of advanced enhancement techniques of latent marks using chemical and lighting techniques, along with selection of the appropriate visualisation techniques to develop latent marks on various substrates
4. Report writing
The production of reports used to record evidence found at a scene and present evidence in court, which will follow the evidence from crime scene to court.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Game Design and Production course.

Module 1: DES207 Media Production - 40 SCQF (20 ECTS)

Module 2: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Game Design and Production course. Please be aware that this is the only option available.

Module: DES315 Professional Project - 60 SCQF (30 ECTS)

DES207 Description

Brief Description

In this module, students will work collaboratively with their peers, as part of a multidisciplinary team, to design and develop an interactive media-based project that makes use of design elements. Individual students will be expected to; make use of relevant development and creative skills to generate elements of a media project; participate in pitching and presentations; hone their communication skills to work effectively within the team setting and present their work clearly; research and test technical pipelines; create project documentation and planning materials; and work, as part of a collective, towards a final interactive piece. Through engaging with this module you will develop Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular: * Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied. * Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions. * Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers. * Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required. * Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising. * Be responsive and responsible in personal, cultural and social contexts. * Understand and embody self-awareness, honesty and integrity in their professional and personal lives. * Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions. * Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts. * Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online. * Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with exposure to the processes, pipelines and challenges involved in team-based design and development of interactive entertainment.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Work as part of a team and undertake a specific role in the production of an interactive prototype.
2. Iteratively produce assets and documentation in support of an entertainment product
3. Reflect upon and present the challenges and issues in collaborative media development

Indicative Content
1. Contextual Overview - How games have been designed, prominent genres, styles and techniques.
2. Concept and Communication - Conceptualising and communicating ideas, scoping requirements, giving and receiving critique.
3. Design Process - Establishing a process, proposing solutions, iteration and documentation.
4. Core Design - Working up the concept, graphics, features, setting, story, objectives, levels.
5. The development team - Roles and responsibilities, scheduling and milestones, inclusive and supportive working.
6. Rules and Mechanics - Implementing choices, interactivity, strategies, motivation and reward, balancing gameplay.
7. Look and Feel- Establishing a style, ambience, colour and mood, sound effects, and music.
8. Cultural and Commercial AwarenessDesigning for an audience, markets, genres and platforms.
9. Production - Using production processes to manage scope, communicate with team members, and deliver a project.
10. Publishing and Showcasing - Exploring opportunities in publishing games, developing pitch and advertising materials, and strategies for promoting your work.

DES315 Description

For this module, students will be required to work together on an interactive media project as part of a multidisciplinary team. Individual students will be expected to contribute to their team by taking on a professional role suited to their area of study. As part of the module, all students will be expected to: communicate with clients and relevant stakeholders; participate in pitching and presentations; research and test technical pipelines; create project documentation and planning materials; and contribute to the iterative design and development of a final interactive prototype.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to operate professionally as a subject specialist within a multidisciplinary development team, contributing to planning, presenting, prototyping, and production.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate evidence of professional competence as a practitioner in their chosen discipline
2. Demonstrate an ability to integrate their own contributions with those of team members from a range of disciplines to deliver a cohesive and functional prototype, constituting a vertical slice of gameplay or interactive experience across the full pre-production lifecycle of an interactive media project including ideation, iterative development, testing, enhancement, completion, and delivery. 
3. Demonstrate teamwork, appropriate communication skills, and the ability to interact with all stakeholders in a professional, respectful and productive manner throughout the production and delivery of a team project

Indicative Content
1. Team Organisation and Management - Attend and participate in team meetings, keep meeting minutes, and assign roles and responsibilities; Identify and overcome team problems, understand conflicts and approaches to conflict resolution, and engage with team building.
2. Communication and Professionalism - Demonstrate the ability to communicate within the team, with tutors, with clients/mentors, and with other stakeholders in a professional and respectful manner.
3. Development Methodologies - Understand and apply appropriate development methodologies framed by the requirements of a project and balance of a team, e.g. agile, scrum, lean, spiral, feature-driven, waterfall/traditional.
4. Research and Concept Development - Research similar products and competitors; Research and interpret the product marketplace, considering platform, user profiles, costs, regional differences etc; Conduct visual and audio research; Iteratively develop design concepts in response to a given brief.
5. Technologies and Pipelines - Research software and hardware technologies; Develop a technical plan for game development; Research, develop, test and document production pipelines.
6. Style and Branding - Develop a brand for the team and the project; Research, develop, document, and communicate a defined visual and audio style; Produce marketing and promotional materials.
7. Pitching and Presentation - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
8. Prototype Development, Testing, and Iteration - Use appropriate software, hardware, game engines, and other tools to deliver a working digital prototype; Engage with regular user testing to inform design iteration, demonstrating an appreciation of user experience.
9. Release Management - Manage the software development process using source control, defect tracking, and build processes.
10. Project Delivery - Consider the methods for delivering products to the market, including market cycles, digital distribution, and the publisher-developer relationship; Deliver a complete prototype with accompanying press kit.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the LLB Law course.

Module 1: LAW202 Law of Succession

Module 2: LAW201 Public Law 2

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the LLB Law course.

Module 1: LAW302 Law of Evidence

Module 2: LAW308 Business Organisations

Module 3: LAW300 Law of Property

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

LAW202 Description

Communication|Problem Solving|Research|Self Evaluation|Planning|Professionalism

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the fundamental knowledge, skills and practical understanding of the law of Succession and Trusts

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Explain and apply the principles of the law of Succession in Scotland in relation to testate and intestate succession;
2. Explain and apply the principles of law in relation to Trusts and understand the uses of trusts in succession, family situations and commercial transactions;
3. Apply those skills by drafting wills and other documents; and
4. Demonstrate skills of comprehension and the application of legal principle.

Indicative Content
1. Intestate Succession
Succession in moveables and heritage; prior rights; legal rights; collation; order of succession re spouses, children, cohabitants and civil partners.
2. Testate Succession
Capacity and diminished capacity; execution and amendment of wills; uncertainty; revocation; subsequent births; transfer of heritage; classification of legacies; accretion; election; residue, division per capita and per stirpes; destinations-over; the unworthy heir; missing persons; common calamity; public policy considerations; and forfeiture
3. Will Substitutes
Nominations; special destinations; liferent and fee; and survivorship.
4. Trusts
Constitution; public and private; charitable trusts; uncertainty; revocability; liferents; vesting; variation; termination of trust; law reform
5. Trustees
Appointment; assumption and resignation; administration; duties; powers; breach of trust and remedies; investment powers; liability to creditors; discharge; law reform
6. Drafting and Interpretation of Wills
Words of severance and conjunction; terms; public policy considerations; prohibitions of accumulations and successive liferents; conditional institution and substitution
7. Inheritance Tax
An overview of the structure and charging of inheritance tax.
8. Adults with Incapacity
Recognition of the issues relating to elderly and other adults who are incapable of managing their affairs; Adults with Incapacity (Scotland) Act 2000; continuing financial and welfare attorneys; financial and welfare guardianship; intervention orders; power to intromit with accounts; The Office of the Public Guardian in Scotland; human rights concerns; and law reform.

LAW201 Description

An introduction to the key doctrines and legal principles of administrative law in the United Kingdom with particular reference to Scotland. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Understand how legal knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practice, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving you knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions (online learning).
• Maintain and continuously develop awareness of your legal responsibilities.

AimsThe aim of this Module is to introduce students to the key principles of administrative law in the United Kingdom with particular reference to Scotland.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify and explain the legal framework of administrative justice in the UK.
2. Understand and explain the relationship between the citizen and the state.
3. Understand the operation of judicial review in Scotland.
4. Identify, state and apply legal principles and demonstrate skills of written and oral communication and legal reasoning.

Indicative Content
1. Administrative Law: Basic concepts, ultra vires, standing in administrative proceedings. Redressing grievances in the public sector.
2. Judicial Review: Tripartite relationships, excess and abuse of power, the ultra vires doctrine, Wednesbury reasonableness, natural justice and other grounds of judicial review.
3. Ombudsmen: Parliamentary and Health Service Ombudsmen, Scottish Public Services Ombudsman.
4. Liability of the Crown and Public Authorities: Crown Proceedings Act 1947, Liability in Delict and Contract, Remedies, Crown Privilege and Public Interest Immunity.
5. Citizen and the State: Citizenship, Nationality, Immigration, Asylum, Deportation, Extradition, European Arrest Warrants, freedom of information
6. Human Rights and Civil Liberties: ECHR, Human Rights Act 1998, Commission for Equality and Human Rights, Police powers, Public order, State security and Official Secrets, Anti-terrorism measures. Privacy and data protection.

LAW302 Description

This module examines the legal rules governing the relevance, admissibility and sufficiency of evidence in civil and criminal proceedings in the courts of law in Scotland.

Aims
The aim of this module is to examine critically the principles governing the relevance, admissibility and sufficiency of evidence in civil and criminal litigation.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand and apply the rules of evidence concerning relevance, admissibility, weight and sufficiency of evidence;
2. Evaluate the legal concept of corroboration as applied in Scots Law
3. Analyse and apply the legal concepts of competence and compellability of witnesses as applied in Scots Law
4. Evaluate the legal concept of privileged evidence in Scots Law
5. Demonstrate higher level legal writing and oral skills and apply legal skills and knowledge in a practical and/or theoretical context.

Indicative Content
1. Basic Concepts
Purpose, Relevance, admissibility, weight and sufficiency of evidence. Burdens and standards of proof, human rights issues
2. Requirements for proof
Presumptions, judicial knowledge, judicial admissions.
3. Types of evidence
Oral, documentary, real evidence, direct and circumstantial, primary and secondary evidence, the best evidence rule.
4. Corroboration
The common law in civil and criminal proceedings, The Moorov doctrine; admissions and confessions, corroboration by distress, dock and other identification, the Civil Evidence (Scotland) Act 1988.
5. Privilege and immunity
Self incrimination, Professional privilege; public interest immunity; confidentiality; without prejudice letters; witnesses and communications.
6. Competence and compellability of witnesses, character
Parties, accused, spouses, co-accused, children, vulnerable witnesses; persons of diminished physical/mental capacity. Accused persons, witnesses; similar fact evidence; Previous convictions, prior history and character.
7. Recovery and Preservation of Evidence
Improperly obtained evidence, warrants, urgency, searches, covert operations. Ss 13-20A Criminal Procedure (S) Act 1995 - police powers.
8. The Hearsay rule and exceptions
Civil and criminal rules, the Civil Evidence (Scotland) Act 1988, ss 259-262 of the Criminal Procedure (Scotland) Act 1995; res gestae and de recenti statements.
9. Opinion + Expert Evidence/Evidence at the Trial or Proof
Expert and Opinion evidence Conduct of inquiry (examination in chief, cross- examination and re- examination), children and vulnerable witnesses.

LAW308 Description

This module deals with the law relating to companies and partnerships.

Aims
To identify and examine the principles of Scots commercial law in relation to partnership and corporate law

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Formulate structured and referenced written responses which evaluate conflicting issues to defined corporate law issues
2. Evaluate partnership, companies and other business vehicles, and critically assess the factors influencing the choice of business organisation;
3. Critically assess the principles of formation, operation and termination of corporate bodies
4. Demonstrate skills of analysis and synthesis applying legal principles to provide solutions to defined problems in the area of partnership and corporate law corporate law

Indicative Content
1. The Law of Partnership
Definition, relationship between partners and between partners and third parties, limited partners, limited liability partnerships.
2. Incorporation
Organisation of business in the UK, registration, promoters, separate legal personality, piercing the veil, minority protection.
3. Company Officers
Directors, role, and duties; auditors, role and duties; company secretary, role and duties.
4. Shares and share capital
Allotment and transfer of shares; maintenance of capital; repurchase and reduction of shares, dividends
5. Unfair prejudice and derivative proceedings
Shareholders’ rights in the face of unfairly prejudicial conduct; shareholders’ rights against directors
6. Insider dealing, meetings
Insider dealing and its prevention; market abuse. Shareholder democracy and decision-making
7. Corporate insolvency
Receiverships, administration orders, liquidation and company voluntary arrangements

LAW300 Description

Law of Property provides an in depth study of the principal concepts of property and particularly in relation to rights and duties to land, in Scots law.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with : a deep understanding of the fundamental concepts of property law and their application to the creation, transfer and discharge of real rights in Scotland

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Explain the nature of property and the types of ownership rights within the Scottish system of landownership, including incorporeal property such as intellectual property
2. Critically analyse the principles applying to the creation, variation, discharge and extinction of real burdens and servitudes. and understand the law of the tenement
3. Understand the relationship of missives and dispositions and the main clauses therein
4. Define and explain the unique features of the contract of lease and real rights in leases
5. Critically assess the system of land registration in Scotland and the developing agenda in relation to land information systems and searching
6. Demonstrate higher order legal skills and knowledge and apply them by problem solving

Indicative Content
1. The Nature of Property and Ownership
Classifications of property. The nature of property and ownership; real and personal rights. Corporeal and incorporeal rights, such as intellectual property. Acquisition of title; rights in security. Hohfeld and the nature of rights. The feudal system of land ownership and its abolition; real rights in land. Separate tenements in the land; Regalia; water rights; mineral rights. Fixtures.
2. Real burdens and title conditions
Real burdens and servitudes, title and interest to enforce. The Title Conditions (S) Act 2003. Variation, discharge and extinction
3. Law of the Tenement
Common law; Tenements (S) Act
4. Registration of Title
The processes and effects of Land Registration. e- conveyancing. The form of the registers and the purposes and processes of searching. Inhibitions and Land Attachment.
5. Contracts for Sale and purchase of Heritage
Common law requirements and typical clauses found in modern missives and their effects.The Scottish Standard Clauses
6. dispositions and standard securities
The form and content of the disposition and the standard security and the significance and effect of the clauses therein, including implied clauses
7. Leases
Real rights in a lease; constitution of lease, obligations of parties; rent; Termination: irritancy, removing, ejection, recovery of possession. Commercial leases. Statutory tenancies.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BA Marketing and Business course.

Module 1: BMT202 Project Management

Module 2: BMT203 Researching Business and Innovation

Module 3 & 4: choose two of the below 10 credit modules:

BMT209 Digital Marketing Principles

BMT210 Digital Marketing Campaigns 

BMT215 Events Budgeting and Finance

BMT212 Cases in Events Management

Or choose from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BA Marketing and Business course.

Module 1: BMT320 Marketing Communications and Design

Module 2: BMT322 Entrepreneurship and Business Start-up

Module 3: BMT307 Managing Across Cultures

BMT202 Description

This module examines the tools and techniques associated with managing projects. Students will also carry out an investigation into a project failure and recommend alternative actions which could have been taken

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an appreciation of the complexity of project management and the tools and techniques performed to aid successful management.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Select, use and explain the various tools and techniques which form part of the project planning and management process.
2. Analyse a project case study and identify where improvements could have been made.

Indicative Content
1. Project management and project teams
Intepreting project specifications and objectives, and the requirements of project stakeholders; Key project challenges for individuals and groups: reviewing the key priorities of time and project management; Understanding the role of a project leader; Understanding team work and how effective teams function; Creating and contributing to effective project teams; Managing teams through project delivery; maintaining goal focus, and managing problems.
2. Project analysis and planning
Analysing project requirements and sub-tasks; Estimating timelines; deadlines and milestones and activity durations; Constructing a project schedule; Resourcing projects; Allocating and smoothing resources; Using Gantt charts to allocate and monitor resource allocation; Project management tools; Using project management software.
3. Managing Projects
Dealing with project risk; Evaluating the probability and potential impact of risk; contingency planning for risk management; project tracking and revision to completion; Evaluating project delivery and management: Analysing the effectiveness of project management processes and the impact of project delivery and non-delivery.
4. Project Management Methodologies
The use of project management methodologies such as Prince2 and SCRUM.

BMT203 Description

An introduction to research methods that could be used for investigating a topic or issue related to business and innovation.

Aims
This module aims to provide the student with an understanding of the principles of research methodology, methods of data collection and data analysis, ethics in research, and how to apply this knowledge to a real-life problem related to business and innovation.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand key elements of a research design;
2. Identify a problem in business and/or innovation and select research methods appropriate for investigating it and achieving research aims;
3. Apply statistical and other quantitative methods to investigate a business problem.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to Research
Explaining the nature and purpose of research; introduction to the different types of research (quantitative, qualitative, mixed methods).
2. Dealing with Practical Issues
Identifying the main stages in the research process; identifying/generating a research topic and setting research aims; creating a research design.
3. Understanding principles of research ethics and dealing with ethical issues in conducting research
4. Data Collection and Analysis
Approaches to qualitative and quantitative data collection. Methods of data analysis.
5. Writing a Research Proposal
Purpose and structure of a research proposal.
6. Descriptive Statistics
Summarising and visualising data sets. Exploring the relationships between variables.
7. Inferential Statistics
Hypothesis testing; selected hypothesis tests.
8. Application of statistical and other quantitative methods to a real-life business problem

BMT209 Description

This module provides students with an understanding of the importance of digital technology in the marketing function in today’s organisation.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with an in-depth understanding of the digital marketing environment and the process of developing effective digital marketing strategies.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Evaluate the efficiency of an organisation’s digital presence in achieving its marketing objectives.
2. Develop digital marketing solutions for specified marketing problems.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction to digital marketing
Discussing the impact of digital transformation on the marketing function. Creating digital strategies that are integrated within the wider marketing strategy and support the organisational goals and objectives.
2. Understanding the digital marketing environment
Examining the internal and external facets of the digital environment that the company operates within including competitors, the digital consumer and the wider digital landscape.
3. The Planning Process
Exploring the models and methods of planning your digital strategies based on audit data, social listening and company objectives.
4. Media and Tools Planning
Selecting the appropriate tools and media to use to support the implementation of the digital marketing strategy.

BMT210 Description

This module provides students with an understanding of the various digital marketing communications tools. The module equips students with an understanding of the process of analysing the success of digital marketing strategies.

Aims
This module aims to give students the understanding of the relevant tools of digital marketing communication and the skills of analysing the data on the outcomes of digital marketing strategies.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Discuss the various tools of digital marketing for an organisations’ marketing communications needs.
2. Evaluate the success of devised digital marketing strategies.

Indicative Content
1. Social Media Marketing and Mobile Marketing
The nature and platforms of social media. The various mobile marketing tools and their role within the wider digital marketing strategy.
2. Paid Search, Online Advertising and Content Marketing
Exploring the tools of display and video advertising on online platforms. Using a relationship marketing approach to your digital marketing with tools of email marketing and content marketing. Enhancing website performance using web optimisation, paid search and SEO/SEM.
3. Digital Campaign Tracking
The process of tracking campaign data on digital media using methods. The tools of the trade, e.g. Google Analytics for analysing success of digital marketing campaigns via monitoring relevant metrics and KPIs.
4. Data Driven Decision-Making
Applying a strategic approach to collecting digital metrics. Exploring the decisions made using metrics and analytics.

BMT212 Description

This module explores the impact of festivals and events on their host communities.

AimsThe aim of this Module is to provide the student: with the skills and knowledge required to assess the direct and indirect impacts of festivals and events on the host community through a case study approach.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify the economic, environmental and social impacts of events and festivals on the host communities.
2. Evaluate the economic, environmental and social impacts of events and festivals on the host communities.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction: The theoretical background: Basic concepts, ideas, principles of festivals, events and communities; Forces-Stressors-State-Impact-Response (FPSIR) model).
2. Types of Events: Local community events to mega and online events.
3. Impact of events: Nature of impacts, impact assessments; Economic, social, environmental, tourism, political, psychological.
4. Future of events: Introduction to the future, industry perception of events future; future trends and issues. Live streaming.
5. Stakeholders: Stakeholder theory Corporate Social Responsibility theory.
6. Case studies in events

BMT215 Description

This module covers some of the financial imperatives in managing an event. Students interested in Events Management might like to consider also taking BMT212 Cases in Events.

Aims

The aim of this module is to give students the skill and knowledge required to manage the finance of an event

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Explain the nature and issues surrounding sponsorship of events
2. Using a pre-written budget, design a break-even analysis for an event
3. Discuss and use the control mechanisms used in the budgeting process

Indicative Content
1. Sources of funding: Determining where funding will come from for your event; funding policies; funding applications to external sponsors; convincing sponsors of the benefits of funding your event
2. Controlling finances: Pre-event controls, operational controls, post control mechanisms

BMT320 Description

This module enables students to gain a theoretical and evidence basis for decision-making in marketing communications and creative design. The module reviews key theories in the field, alongside key empirical evidence that should enable students to create, design, analyse, evaluate, provide recommendations for and plan marketing communications. The module also addresses the practical elements of marketing communications, such as creative design, filming and video editing, and communication planning.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : a sound theoretical and evidence basis for decision-making in marketing communications, and the ability to plan and design marketing effective marketing communications.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically analyse and evaluate the approaches, principles, management and contribution of marketing communications and creative design to businesses.
2. To develop creative communicative and design led solutions for a specified marketing problem.

Indicative Content
1. Marketing communications theories
Theoretical models that underpin marketing communications.
2. Planning effective marketing communication campaigns: context analysis, objectives, marketing communications strategy, creative strategy, marketing communications mix, channel selection, budget and scheduling, evaluation
3. Developing the creative message
4. Creative design principles and developing marketing communication materials
5. The marketing communications mix: Advertising, Public Relations, Sales promotion, Personal Selling, Direct Marketing
6. Digital marketing communications and digital channels
7. Integrated marketing communications
8. Responsible marketing communications: societal effects and ethics of marketing communications; legal responsibilities
9. Psychological perspectives on marketing communications

BMT322 Description

This module introduces students the skills and knowledge needed to launch a small business successfully. This module defines and helps students acquire the personal and professional skills needed in order to develop a professional career and/or to succeed as entrepreneurs in Small and Medium sized Enterprises (SMEs).

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : The opportunity to: 1. To raise awareness of self-employment as a career option. 2. Understand and analyse the role of the entrepreneur in the process of business start-up and development. 3. Develop and practice the skills necessary to operate effectively as entrepreneurs in the small business sector.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Reflect on the skills and qualities they possess and analyse how these relate to the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs;
2. Understand the skills and approaches the entrepreneur brings to the process of value creation;
3. Design a simple business plan which demonstrates the commercial viability of a proposed small business start-up

Indicative Content
1. What makes an entrepreneur?
An introduction to entrepreneurship and an analysis of the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs
2. Business Ideas
Strategies for generating successful business ideas
3. Environmental scanning
Identifying a good business idea and the future direction of our organisation
4. Business Plans
Developing a credible business plan that includes evaluating business ideas Assessing risk and uncertainty; identifying potential customers, markets and market segments; assessing operations, USP and competition; price vs quality & profits.
5. Getting finance
Presenting the business idea; different potential sources of finance

BMT307 Description

In this module students will be introduced to current thinking on the effects of globalisation and culture on management practice and how national cultures shape the processes of employee development and organisational performance when working both within the UK and beyond.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of the different approaches to managing resources in different cultural settings and of the practical challenges of cross− cultural management in a local and global context.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Analyse the relationship between national culture, organisational behaviour and management practice;
2. Evaluate the effects of globalisation/internationalisation of business and politics on local management, national resources and cultural values;
3. Analyse the recent trends and developments in cross−cultural management and to assess their effects on managing diverse populations in the UK.

Indicative Content
1. Introduction: The theoretical background: The meaning and importance of managing across− cultures, perceptions and models of culture and cultural differences in organisation theory and management studies. The context and dimensions of managing across cultures, convergence and divergence theories, and classification of the different approaches to managing in different countries.
2. Managing in the Anglo−Saxon countries: Analysing the Anglo-Saxon approach to management; Managing in the USA and the UK.
3. Managing in Asian Countries: Effects of Confucianism, Communism and economic dynamism on management and organisation in East Asia countries; Managing in China, Japan and South Korea.
4. Managing in Western European Countries: Analysing the Francophone, the Germanic and other European models of management. The impact of the EU integration and expansion on employment and labour markets. Managing in France and Germany.
5. Managing in Less Developed Countries: From colonialism to dependency: the impact of international trade, transfer of knowledge and technology, ideologies and religious beliefs on management (mismanagement) and organisation in less developed countries. Managing in selected African and Middle−Eastern countries.
6. Contemporary issues of cross−cultural management: Global ethics and global labour markets: Gender, race, disability and age concerns. International organizations' responses to changing demographics; International organizations' responses to skills shortages. International approaches to managing diversity; and the use of IT in International HRM.
7. Managing diverse groups in the UK: The manager as a force for inclusive development and wellbeing of all staff. Ensuring communications to staff are person-centred and inclusive; Ensuring staff and customers from different cultures are safe from harm in the way the organisation and its staff deals with them.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Psychology course.

Module 1: PSY206 Essential Research Methods and Analysis for Psychology (experience of SPSS or Jamovi would be beneficial)

Module 2: PSY216 Psychology in the Real World

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of BSc Psychology course.

Module 1: PSY302 Human Development across the Lifespan

Module 2: PSY303 Advanced Research, Design and Analysis

Module 3: CNS305 Mental Health Psychology: Living with a Diagnosis

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

PSY206 Description

To build on research methods knowledge and prepare student for third year Core Research Methods

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the opportunity to further develop the knowledge and skills required to design, conduct, analyse and report quantitative and qualitative psychological research in APA format

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Report, design and conduct ethically acceptable psychological research using techniques taught on the module.
2. Report, evaluate psychological research and present this in APA format.
3. Use SPSS to analyse empirical data utilising a variety of statistical techniques.
4. Identify and locate, using a variety of resources, suitable reference material for practical work.
5. Demonstrate, via assessment a good understanding of the key principles of psychological research design and data interpretation

Indicative Content
1. Methods of Research
Main quantitative and qualitative research methods available to psychologists; Use in applied settings; advantages and disadvantages
2. The Experimental Method
Variables and levels; hypotheses; design - basic and advanced; control techniques; validity and reliability in experimentation; ethics in experimentation
3. Data Analysis - Descriptive Statistics
Data types; measures of central tendency; measures of dispersion; normal distribution; graphing data; confidence intervals.
4. Data Analysis - Inferential Statistics
Test selection; parametric and nonparametric 2-sample test of difference; Within and Between one-way ANOVA and Non-parametric ANOVA, effect size; power; correlation; Tests of both internal and external reliability; inter rater reliability
5. Qualitative Methods
Types of qualitative research techniques; questionnaire design, interviewing - types, advantages, disadvantages; analysing interview material.
6. Quantitative Methods
Experimental method, two variable tests of difference (parametric and non-parametric), tests of relationships (parametric and non-parametric); multilevel testing (parametric and non-parametric), follow up testing (parametric and non-parametric). Reliability analysis using Cronbach's alpha, quantitative content analysis, item analysis
7. Ethics
Creating and conducting ethical research based on BPS Ethical Guidelines
8. Reporting Research
Sections and content of an APA formatted psychology lab report; APA referencing
9. Information Searching
Structured and unstructured search; Search using the Internet and locating electronic journals using the university library system and appropriate data bases
10. I.T.Skills
Designing a lab report template using Word for Windows; using SPSS for data analysis.

PSY216 Description

This is a student-led module in which students and staff collaborate in the assessment content and marking criteria. The area of study is psychological research related to 'real life' situations showing how psychology can be practiced in environments such as industry, education, health and sport, and delivered as seminars by staff and external speakers. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes . In particular:

• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising.
• Develop digital fluency, giving them knowledge, skills and confidence to embrace digital solutions.
• Actively engage with relevant stakeholders to make a real contribution to society locally, nationally and internationally.

Aims

The aim of this Module is to provide the student with an understanding of how psychological theory is applied in the real world, as conveyed by psychologists working in practice across a variety of different roles. The module is designed to be student-led to increase understanding of assessment and pedagogy, and involves group work to develop experience of working in teams. By the end of the module students should have an ability to use technology and communication skills to show their understanding of the effectiveness of real-world psychological applications.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Show knowledge of how psychological research is applied to real world issues.
2. Show an understanding of the effectiveness of applied psychology in practice.
3. Communicate psychological issues and research effectively.
4. Work in groups, with effective communication, teamwork and decision making.
5. Understand the purpose, design and practice of assessments and feedback.

Indicative Content
1. Psychological Therapies in the Real World: Understanding the applications and impact of psychology therapies, such as cognitive behavioural therapy.
2. Psychology in the Public Sector: Understanding the ways in which local and national governments use psychology research.
3. Human Factors: Understanding how psychology impacts performance in safety-critical workplaces such as medicine and aviation.
4. Environmental Psychology: To what extent are the environments we live and work in influenced by psychology?
5. Sports Psychology in the Real World: What is sports psychology and how is it applied to issues like duty of care?
6. Applied Forensic Psychology: Applying psychology theory to crime to help answer questions like ‘why do offenders offend?’
7. Applied Educational Psychology
How can psychology theories be applied in teaching, such as supporting children with learning difficulties?

PSY302 Description

This is a BPS core psychology module that examines theories, methods and empirical data relevant to psychological development throughout the lifespan.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with knowledge and understanding of theories and empirical data in the core areas of developmental psychology and changes throughout the lifespan.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand and critically evaluate theories of psychological development in light of relevant empirical research.
2. Demonstrate comprehensive knowledge of developmental change in cognition, emotion, socialisation and physical development, including major developmental milestones in children and adolescents.
3. Show a critical awareness of current thinking on the interaction between biological bases and environmental influences in development.
4. Demonstrate conceptual knowledge of research methods in the domain of development and knowledge of when to apply these.

Indicative Content
1. Biological basis of development; theories and milestones
Pre-and postnatal brain development, brain maturation, biological basis of ageing.
2. How to study development?
Designs and approaches.
3. Infancy
Methods for studying infant development, physical development in infancy, cognitive development in infancy: Memory and pre- cursors to language, social and emotional development in infancy.
4. Early Childhood
Methods for studying early childhood, physical and cognitive development in early childhood, language development in early childhood, social and emotional development in early childhood, moral development in early childhood.
5. Middle Childhood
Physical and cognitive development in middle childhood, social development and peer relations in middle childhood. Emotional and Moral Development in Middle Childhood
6. Adolescence
Physical and cognitive development in adolescence, social and emotional development in adolescence.
7. Adulthood
Biological, cognitive and social changes in middle adulthood. Theories and data on midlife crisis.
8. Ageing
Biological, cognitive and social changes in late adulthood; models of cognitive decline; emotional and personality changes, dementia, death, longevity.

PSY303 Description

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to design and conduct independent research projects at honours level using the appropriate research methodology.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate a broad knowledge and understanding of the research process (both qualitative and quantitative) and designated issues in experimental design.
2. Via active participation in class: run, analyse and interpret results from a class experiment using Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) and use this information to write up an assessed report.
3. Apply knowledge and understanding of the research process (qualitative/quantitative) and issues in experimental design to prepare a research proposal for ethical review (under supervision).
4. Via active participation in class: run, analyse and interpret results using qualitative methodology and use this information to write up an assessed report.

Indicative Content
1. Analysis of Variance
As part of the ANOVA section we will briefly revise variance and one-way ANOVA. We will then move on to examine factorial ANOVA designs; within, between and mixed designs; main effects and interactions; exploring interactions and multiple comparisons (a priori and post-hoc).
2. ANOVA practical
Throughout the ANOVA labs and lectures, students will participate in the design, implementation and data gathering of a study suitable for analysis with ANOVA and will write this up as an assessed piece of coursework.
3. Experimental Design
Here we will examine methodological issues in design, identifying limitations of designs, defining a research question, hypothesis testing and operationalising variables. We will also look at Type I and II errors; effect sizes and statistical power.
4. Qualitative methods of data collection and analysis
We will cover the theoretical underpinning of qualitative methods. This will include the design of research questions; how to code data from visual and textual formats, the application of techniques such as content and thematic analysis. We will use textual data (such as interview schedules) to carry out a qualitative analysis. This work will contribute towards the assessed qualitative report,
5. Correlation and Multiple Regression
Here we will cover simple linear regression models and multiple predictors of a criterion variable (multiple linear regression). Here we explain statistical tests for multiple regression models.
6. Laboratory Skills
Students are given extensive training in the advanced use of SPSS for analyses. Regular laboratory attendance is recommended in order to develop strong research skills. This will allow the individual to become a confident researcher.
7. Project proposal for supervisor feedback and subsequent ethics submission
Students are required to write an ethics proposal for their fourth year project with support and guidance from their allocated supervisor. Research design and analysis skills are employed to design a suitable experiment/study. Identifying, and addressing, possible ethical issues are central to this process. Supervisors will give feedback to a draft of the proposal.
8. Research Skills: Writing and work management
Communicating effectively in oral and written form, using research literature effectively. Reporting and interpreting. Writing using American Psychological Association editorial style. Developing a meeting agenda, goal setting and evaluating progress, communicating effectively in supervision meetings, identifying responsibilities. Sustaining research work in laboratory classes.

CNS305 Description

This module examines the psychology of mental health disorders and explores how patients experience their illness. Through engaging with this module you will develop the Intellectual, Professional, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge in order to recognise problems and solutions.
• Be responsive and responsible in personal, cultural and social contexts.
• Be inclusive, globally conscientious and socially respectful, and self-reflective.

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide students with an awareness of how people diagnosed with a mental illness feel and how it impacts cognitive processes and behaviour. We will look at the symptomology, treatment and outcomes for patients, as well as how living with a diagnosis impacts cognition beyond the changes linked with their underlying condition.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the complexity of clinical assessment, formulation, aetiology and treatment processes.
2. Evaluate the role of clinical and health psychology in a modern mental health service by assessing its contribution to the promotion of health and alleviation of distress.
3. Understand the impact a mental health diagnosis has on cognitive processes and behaviour in patients.
4. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the importance of scientific rigor and measurement in clinical and health psychology.

Indicative Content
1. Models to aid diagnosis: Introduction to the use of biopsychosocial models in the diagnosis of mental ill health.
2. Understanding causes: Exploration of the biological, psychological and environmental causes of mental health disorders such as psychoses, mood disorders, developmental disorders or learning difficulties.
3. Treatment and outcomes: Investigate treatment options for patients with disorders and categories of distress, evaluate research on treatment outcomes for different categories of patients.
4. Lived experience: Consideration of the lived experience of patients from symptom onset, diagnoses and treatment, experience of the clinicians and health workers in supporting patients with mental illness.
5. Prognosis and life after treatment: Evaluating how patients with different categories of distress respond to treatment, how their biological and environmental circumstances influence prognosis, and managing mental health conditions long term.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Sport and Exercise course.

Module 1: SPS202 Key Concepts in Biomechanics for Sport and Exercise

Module 2: SPS210 Physical Activity for Health and Wellbeing

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of BSc Sport and Exercise and related Sport courses.

Module 1: SPS312 Research Methods (or this module can be swapped for 20 MySuccess credits if you choose two sports modules from the list below)

For modules 2 & 3, choose two of the following or one of the following and 20 credits from our MySuccess modules:

SPS306 Applied Sport Psychology

SPS308 Applied Biomechanics for Performance

SPS309 Physical Activity and Health Promotion

SPS311 Physiology of Obesity and Non-communicable Diseases

SPS319 Sport Development in Practice

SPS202 Description

This module introduces the student to the study of biomechanical concepts applied within a sport health and performance perspective. It will offer the student the opportunity to analyse movement using various biomechanical laboratory techniques including those relating to movement analysis, reaction forces and the application of Newton's Laws.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with an understanding of the core concepts of biomechanical concepts and basic practical laboratory skills within biomechanics.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe the how the biomechanics of movement influence sport and exercise performance.
2. Discuss and apply laboratory means of measuring the biomechanics of movement.
3. Apply formulae relating to the biomechanics.
4. Be able to discuss biomechanical concepts in a sport and exercise context.
5. Evaluate a laboratory experiment, which requires application of knowledge and analysis skills pertinent to biomechanics.

Indicative Content
1. Biomechanical concepts in sport and exercise
Further develop understanding of how motion, forces, movement of mass, and acceleration can be applied in a sport, health and exercise context.
2. Specialist equipment use (injury)
Learn about the use of specialist equipment, such as force platforms, 2D motion analysis, contact mats, and electromyography to assess injury risk.
3. Specialist equipment use (performance)
Learn about the use of specialist equipment, such as force platforms, 2D motion analysis, contact mats, and electromyography to improve performance.

SPS210 Description

The module introduces the student to the basic concepts and importance of physical activity for health and wellbeing.

Aims
To provide students with a broad understanding of the core concepts of physical activity and health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify and explain key factors that underpin health.
2. Summarise and discuss how physical activity can affect physical and mental wellbeing.
3. Demonstrate knowledge and awareness of general principles of strength and conditioning for basic programme design and implementation to enable health and wellbeing in the general population.

Indicative Content
1. Health correlates and determinants
Introduction to factors that underpin health with a focus on the Dahlgren and Whitehead model.
2. Role and importance of physical activity and health
Introduction to evidence of how physical activity can impact both physical and mental health, and the role and importance of physical activity in contemporary society.
3. Principles of strength and conditioning training for programme design
Introduction to the key concepts and fundamental principles of S&C for the general population. These include how to conduct an appropriate needs analysis and how this process informs the construction and implementation of basic programme designs in the context of health and wellbeing.

SPS312 Description

This module will develop students’ ideas about research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health, enabling them to better understand and appreciate published research and design their own research project.

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with the ability to design and carry out a research project (in their final year of study).

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Identify, refine and rationalise a suitable and appropriate research question
2. Critique published literature in the field of sport, exercise, physical activity and/or health
3. Construct an appropriate and ethical research design
4. Obtain practical research skills in preparation for data collection and analysis

Indicative Content
1. The research process
Students will learn and engage in a research process by which they will come to understand the steps associated with planning and conducting a research process.
2. Formulating and refining research questions
Students will learn how research ideas are questions are generated and refined.
3. Research methodologies
Students will be exposed to various research methodologies (e.g., quantitative, qualitative and mixed−methods) in order to develop an appreciation of diverse approaches to research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health.
4. Ethical issues
Students will develop an awareness of the key ethical issues associated with research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health.
5. Practical skill development
Students will be given opportunities to develop their practical research skills in their chosen discipline area.

SPS306 Description

This module builds upon the theoretical and knowledge of sports psychology and introduces aspects of applied sports psychology in the sport and performance context.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to discuss the role of psychological skills in sport and critically analyse the development of psychological skills training programmes to improve sport performance.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Describe and critically appraise sports psychological literature related to performance enhancement.
2. Discuss the application of psychological principles in the sports context
3. Identify and integrate psychological interventions strategies to particular sport performance-related scenarios.

Indicative Content
1. Sports psychology context and practice
Role/s of the sports psychologists; contexts and different perspectives on the work of a sports psychologist.
2. Planning and developing interventions
The needs analysis process; empowerment; ownership and motivation; assessment of efficacy.
3. Psychological skills training
Theory and research of goal setting, relaxation, energisation, imagery, positive self talk, pre-performance and performance routines. Performance enhancement contexts; injury prevention and rehabilitation contexts.

SPS308 Description

This module is designed to build and advance the principles of biomechanics and introduce the concept of performance analysis within a sporting context. Utilising biomechanics to create evidence based intervention strategies to optimise performance.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the knowledge and ability to apply biomechanical principles to the analysis of performance for the production of evidence based interventions.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Understand the use and application of notational analysis within a performance setting
2. Analyse and apply biomechanical principles to the analysis of sporting performance
3. Critically evaluate existing biomechanical models in relation to sporting performance
4. Use and understand biomechanical and performance analysis software
5. Develop intermediate biomechanical laboratory skills

Indicative Content
1. Performance Analysis
Students will identify what performance analysis is, observe performance analysis against existing models, apply and assess the efficacy of the different types of performance analysis.
2. Notational Analysis
Students will consider concepts of notational analysis and be introduced to methods of notational analysis for team and individual performance. They will be asked to apply notational analysis methods to a performance setting.
3. Biomechanical concepts associated with performance
Students will critically evaluate biomechanical concepts in relation to their application within a sporting/performance concept. Biomechanical factors that contribute to performance or can be used to optimise performance will be discussed.
4. Development of intermediate laboratory skills
Students will develop intermediate laboratory skills in collection of biomechanical data including, 3D assessment of movement, kinetics using force platforms (ground reaction forces and stability).
5. Data processing and analysis
Students will be taught how to effectively process and analyse biomechanical data generated using biomechanical laboratory equipment.

SPS309 Description

This module introduces the student to health issues high on the policy agenda and the ways in which participation in physical activity can be and is promoted as a way of addressing these issues.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the students with an understanding of the complexities of health promotion and the potential for participation in physical activity to both alleviate and exacerbate contemporary health issues.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Demonstrate a critical understanding of the concept of health and health promotion.
2. Critically discuss the importance of promoting physical activity in contemporary society.
3. Explain how health promotion interventions may often exacerbate existing health inequalities.
4. Appraise a physical activity intervention in relation to its potential impact on health inequalities.

Indicative Content
1. Defining Health
Students will understand the different ways in which health can and will be defined
2. Complexity of health promotion in contemporary Society
Students will explore the ways in which health promotion has the potential to both reduce and exacerbate existing social inequalities
3. Physical activity, its determinants and importance for health promotion
Students will develop a critical understanding of what factors influence physical activity and its fundamental role in health promotion
4. Critical Engagement with the Obesity ‘Epidemic’
Students will develop a critical understanding of why obesity is prioritised on the health policy agenda
5. Health promotion, physical activity and the environment
Students will explore the environmental factors that influence the promotion of health and physical activity participation

SPS311 Description

This module will cover the aetiology, physiology and pathophysiology of obesity and the principal non-communicable diseases.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with knowledge of obesity and a selection of non-communicable diseases that affect the human body and how these conditions impact upon lifestyle and lifespan.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Critically discuss the major pathophysiological processes and underlying mechanisms of obesity and a range of non-communicable diseases such as type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular diseases and cancer.
2. Describe the symptoms, prevalence, morbidity, mortality, and risk factors associated with the examined conditions.
3. Identify and evaluate the importance of physical activity in the prevention and management of the human conditions covered.
4. Critically analyse and evaluate scientific research publications in the area.

Indicative Content
1. Pathophysiology of Obesity
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of obesity and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.
2. Pathophysiology of Type II Diabetes
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of Type II Diabetes and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.
3. Pathophysiology of Cardiovascular
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of Cardiovascular disease and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.
4. Pathophysiology of Cancer
Critical overview of the pathophysiology of cancer and its exacerbation by physical inactivity.

SPS319 Description

This module provides students with a critical overview of sport development to provide the student with knowledge and expertise to effectively develop sport development programmes in line with current policies and strategies. This module will help students develop Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising
• Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts
• Actively engage with relevant stakeholders to make a real contribution to society locally, nationally and internationally

Aims

The aim of this module is to provide a critical overview of sport structures, policies, and funding to inform knowledge of sport development in the UK and provide student led opportunities to create sport development programmes.

Learning Outcomes

By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically evaluate structures, policies and funding that guide sport development and practice
2. Demonstrate the ability to create Sport Development Programmes using strategic management principles and evaluation methods
3. Appraise sports development programmes and priorities
4. Critically reflect upon the challenges and prospects of sport development in the UK and internationally

Indicative Content
1. Sport Development: An overview of the different conceptualisations of sport development such as elite sport development, sport for sports sake and sport-for-development. Students will review a range of sport development programmes such as those focused on health, inequalities, unemployment and talent development.
2. Sport Policy: A critical overview of historical and contemporary sport policy which guides sport development within the UK and internationally. Students will explore the ways policy is actioned within the field of sport development.
3. Organisations in Sport: A critical review of how sport is structured and organised in the UK in relation to power and partnerships.
4. Creating sport development programmes: Students will be given the opportunity to create sport development programmes using knowledge of strategic management principles, monitoring and evaluation and funding.

Option 1 

This pathway is from the 2nd year of the BSc Sport and Management course.

Module 1: BMT202 Project Management or SPS210 Physical Activity for Health and Wellbeing

Module 2: BMT215 Events Budgeting and Finance

Module 3: choose 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

Option 2 

This pathway is from the 3rd year of the BSc Sport and Management course.

Module 1: SPS312 Research Methods

Module 2: SPS319 Sport Development in Practice

Module 3: BMT316 Event Marketing or BMT322 Entrepreneurship and Business Start-up

You also have the option to swap any one of these modules for 20 credits from our MySuccess modules

BMT202 Description

This module examines the tools and techniques associated with managing projects. Students will also carry out an investigation into a project failure and recommend alternative actions which could have been taken..

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with: an appreciation of the complexity of project management and the tools and techniques performed to aid successful management.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Select, use and explain the various tools and techniques which form part of the project planning and management process.
2. Analyse a project case study and identify where improvements could have been made.

Indicative Content
1. Project management and project teams - Interpreting project specifications and objectives, and the requirements of project stakeholders; Key project challenges for individuals and groups: reviewing the key priorities of time and project management; Understanding the role of a project leader; Understanding team work and how effective teams function; Creating and contributing to effective project teams; Managing teams through project delivery; maintaining goal focus, and managing problems.
2. Project analysis and planning - Analysing project requirements and sub-tasks; Estimating timelines; deadlines and milestones and activity durations; Constructing a project schedule; Resourcing projects; Allocating and smoothing resources; Using Gantt charts to allocate and monitor resource allocation; Project management tools; Using project management software.
3. Managing Projects - Dealing with project risk; Evaluating the probability and potential impact of risk; contingency planning for risk management; project tracking and revision to completion; Evaluating project delivery and management: Analysing the effectiveness of project management processes and the impact of project delivery and non-delivery.
4. Project Management Methodologies - The use of project management methodologies such as Prince2 and SCRUM. 

SPS210 Description

This module explores the crucial role of physical activity in promoting health and overall wellbeing. Students will delve into basic concepts in physical activity and its epidemiology, gaining insights into the prevalence and patterns of physical activity. The module allows students to begin to understand the nature and quality of evidence, enabling students to assess and interpret studies related to physical activity. Physical activity's effects on physical and mental health will be explored, providing a foundation for understanding its preventative and rehabilitative benefits. Fundamental principles of exercise program design will be introduced, empowering students to begin to show an understanding of tailored interventions for diverse populations. Practical aspects of designing safe and effective exercise programs will be emphasised. The module also addresses physical activity behaviour and motivation. Students will explore some behaviour change theories and communication strategies, preparing them to motivate individuals to adopt and maintain active lifestyles. Through engaging with this module, you will also develop the intellectual, professional and digital Abertay attributes. In particular: * Understand how knowledge is generated, processed and disseminated, and actively apply knowledge to recognise problems and solutions. * Be equipped and motivated to continue learning and professional development throughout their careers; * Be equipped for workforce transitions and lifelong learning, including the ability to learn online.

Aims
The overall aim is to equip students with a broad understanding of the significance of physical activity in enhancing physical and mental health.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Understand foundational concepts and public health principles related to physical activity and health.
2. Demonstrate an understanding of the quality of research evidence in the physical activity area
3. Summarise and discuss how physical activity can affect physical and mental health.
4. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of how different modes of exercise impact physical and mental health in the general population.

Indicative Content
1. The fundamental concepts and public health principles related to physical activity and health - Introduction to physical activity and public health
2. The role and importance of physical activity for health and wellbeing - Introduction to, and understanding the nature and quality of, evidence of how physical activity can impact both physical and mental health.
3. The introduction to the fundamental concepts and principles of exercise programme design - These include to varying exercise modalities and their benefits for the maintenance of general health and wellbeing.

BMT215 Description

This module covers some of the financial imperatives in managing an event. Students interested in Events Management might like to consider also taking BMT212 Cases in Events.

Aims
The aim of this module is to give students the skill and knowledge required to manage the finance of an event

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Explain the nature and issues surrounding sponsorship of events
2. Using a pre-written budget, design a break-even analysis for an event
3. Discuss and use the control mechanisms used in the budgeting process

Indicative Content
1. Sources of funding: Determining where funding will come from for your event; funding policies; funding applications to external sponsors; convincing sponsors of the benefits of funding your event
2. Controlling finances: Pre-event controls, operational controls, post control mechanisms

SPS312 Description

This module will develop students’ ideas about research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health, enabling them to better understand and appreciate published research and design their own research project.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide the student with the ability to design and carry out a research project (in their final year of study).

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to:
1. Identify, refine and rationalise a suitable and appropriate research question
2. Critique published literature in the field of sport, exercise, physical activity and/or health
3. Construct an appropriate and ethical research design
4. Obtain practical research skills in preparation for data collection and analysis

Indicative Content
1. The research process
Students will learn and engage in a research process by which they will come to understand the steps associated with planning and conducting a research process.
2. Formulating and refining research questions
Students will learn how research ideas are questions are generated and refined.
3. Research methodologies
Students will be exposed to various research methodologies (e.g., quantitative, qualitative and mixed−methods) in order to develop an appreciation of diverse approaches to research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health.
4. Ethical issues
Students will develop an awareness of the key ethical issues associated with research in sport, exercise, physical activity and health.
5. Practical skill development
Students will be given opportunities to develop their practical research skills in their chosen discipline area.

SPS319 Description

This module provides students with a critical overview of sport development to provide the student with knowledge and expertise to effectively develop sport development programmes in line with current policies and strategies. This module will help students develop Intellectual, Professional, Personal, Digital and Active Citizen Abertay Attributes. In particular:

• Master their subject, understand how it is evolving, appreciate the importance of interdisciplinarity and recognise how what has been learned can be applied.
• Be able to work both independently and collaboratively, understanding the values and responsibilities of equality and playing a leadership and a team-member role as required.
• Be determined, ambitious, articulate, adaptable, self-reflective, resilient, practical, proactive, innovative and enterprising
• Be prepared for the world of work and understand the likely impact of digital technology in their chosen subject and across contexts
• Actively engage with relevant stakeholders to make a real contribution to society locally, nationally and internationally

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide a critical overview of sport structures, policies, and funding to inform knowledge of sport development in the UK and provide student led opportunities to create sport development programmes.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically evaluate structures, policies and funding that guide sport development and practice
2. Demonstrate the ability to create Sport Development Programmes using strategic management principles and evaluation methods
3. Appraise sports development programmes and priorities
4. Critically reflect upon the challenges and prospects of sport development in the UK and internationally

Indicative Content
1. Sport Development: An overview of the different conceptualisations of sport development such as elite sport development, sport for sports sake and sport-for-development. Students will review a range of sport development programmes such as those focused on health, inequalities, unemployment and talent development.
2. Sport Policy: A critical overview of historical and contemporary sport policy which guides sport development within the UK and internationally. Students will explore the ways policy is actioned within the field of sport development.
3. Organisations in Sport: A critical review of how sport is structured and organised in the UK in relation to power and partnerships.
4. Creating sport development programmes: Students will be given the opportunity to create sport development programmes using knowledge of strategic management principles, monitoring and evaluation and funding.

BMT316 Description

This module applies the principles of marketing and communications to events marketing. The module explores the fundamentals of managing the marketing of events and the use of events within effective marketing and communications campaigns.

Aims
The aim of this module is to provide students with a holistic and critical understanding of the range of complex elements of events marketing within a global and technology-enabled marketing environment.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Critically discuss the distinct nature of marketing within the events sector.
2. Critically explore the role of events in the development of effective marketing and communications campaigns
3. Provide a creative and strategic solution to a specific events marketing challenge

Indicative Content
1. Principles of Events Marketing Planning and Delivery
The factors influencing decision-making in events marketing. The nature of creating and executing events marketing plans.
2. The Role of Events in Marketing Communications
The relationship between events, marketing and communications. How does events marketing support effective marketing and communications strategies. The use of marketing and communications tactics in supporting events marketing.
3. Digital Media and Events Marketing
The use of digital media in planning, executing and evaluating the success events marketing plans.
4. Events marketing and the demands of a sustainable agenda
Events are major contributors to the global economy supporting other sectors such as tourism, hospitality and entertainment. This module discusses balancing the demands of the sustainable future with the contribution of events to the economy.

BMT322 Description

This module introduces students the skills and knowledge needed to launch a small business successfully. This module defines and helps students acquire the personal and professional skills needed in order to develop a professional career and/or to succeed as entrepreneurs in Small and Medium sized Enterprises (SMEs).

Aims
The aim of this Module is to provide the student with : The opportunity to: 1. To raise awareness of self-employment as a career option. 2. Understand and analyse the role of the entrepreneur in the process of business start-up and development. 3. Develop and practice the skills necessary to operate effectively as entrepreneurs in the small business sector.

Learning Outcomes
By the end of this module the student should be able to :
1. Reflect on the skills and qualities they possess and analyse how these relate to the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs;
2. Understand the skills and approaches the entrepreneur brings to the process of value creation;
3. Design a simple business plan which demonstrates the commercial viability of a proposed small business start-up

Indicative Content
1. What makes an entrepreneur?
An introduction to entrepreneurship and an analysis of the skills and qualities associated with successful entrepreneurs
2. Business Ideas
Strategies for generating successful business ideas
3. Environmental scanning
Identifying a good business idea and the future direction of our organisation
4. Business Plans
Developing a credible business plan that includes evaluating business ideas Assessing risk and uncertainty; identifying potential customers, markets and market segments; assessing operations, USP and competition; price vs quality & profits.
5. Getting finance
Presenting the business idea; different potential sources of finance